ProStream 9000

Stream Processing Platform

RELEASE 10.3

Software Guide

Rev B
December 2013
Copyright © 2000—2013 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. Omneon, and the Omneon logo are trademarks of Harmonic Inc.

Disclaimer
Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be
deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty. The information contained herein
is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute a binding offer for sale of the product described herein. Harmonic assumes no responsibility or
liability arising from the use of the products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Harmonic. The use and purchase of this product do
not convey a license under any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any intellectual property rights of Harmonic. Nothing hereunder constitutes a
representation or warranty that using any products in the manner described herein will not infringe any patents of third parties.

Trademark Acknowledgments
Harmonic and all Harmonic product names are trademarks of Harmonic Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The software may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of those agreements.

May be covered by one or more of U.S. Patents No. 6,571,351; 6,696,996; 6,545,721; 6,574,225; 6,895,003; 6,522,649; 6,643,702; foreign counterparts
and pending patent applications.
This system is distributed with certain other software that may require disclosure or distribution of licenses, copyright notices, conditions of use, disclaimers
and/or other matter. Use of this system or otherwise fulfilling their conditions constitutes your acceptance of them, as necessary. Copies of such licenses,
notices, conditions, disclaimers and/or other matter are available in any one of the following locations: the LEGAL NOTICES AND LICENSES directory of the
distribution disk of the software, the root directory of the hard disk drive of the Products, or by contacting us at [email protected].

Notice
Information contained in this guide is subject to change without notice or obligation. While every effort has been made to ensure that the information is
accurate as of the publication date, Harmonic Inc. assumes no liability for errors or omissions. In addition, Harmonic Inc. assumes no responsibility for
damages resulting from the use of this guide.

License Agreement and Limited Warranty

1. AGREEMENT: This is a legal agreement ("Agreement") between you ("you" or "your") and Harmonic, or its appropriate local affiliate ("Harmonic", "we",
"us" or "our"). Use of our product(s) and any updates thereto purchased or validly obtained by you (the "Products"), and/or the Software (as defined below)
(collectively, the "System"), constitutes your acceptance of this Agreement. "Use" includes opening or breaking the seal on the packet containing this
Agreement, installing or downloading the Software as defined below or using the Software preloaded or embedded in your System. As used herein, the term
"Software" means the Harmonic owned software and/or firmware used in or with the Products and embedded into, provided with or loaded onto the
Products in object code format, but does not include, and this Agreement does not address, any third-party or free or open source software separately
licensed to you ("Third Party Software"). If you do not agree to this Agreement, you shall promptly return the System with a dated receipt to the seller for a
full refund.
2. LICENSE: Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement (including payment), we hereby grant you a nonexclusive, nontransferable license to use
the object code version of the Software embedded into, provided solely for use with or loaded onto the Product, and the accompanying documentation
("Documentation") for your internal business purposes. The Software and any authorized copies are owned by us or our suppliers, and are protected by law,
including without limitation the copyright laws and treaties of the U.S.A. and other countries. Evaluation versions of the Software may be subject to a time-
limited license key.
3. RESTRICTIONS: You (and your employees and contractors) shall not attempt to reverse engineer, disassemble, modify, translate, create derivative works
of, rent, lease (including use on a timesharing, applications service provider, service bureau or similar basis), loan, distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer
the System, in whole or part except to the extent otherwise permitted by law. The Software may be operated on a network only if and as permitted by its
Documentation. You may make one (1) back up copy of the object code of the Software for archival purposes only. Evaluation Software will be run in a lab,
nonproductive environment. Results of any benchmark or other performance tests may not be disclosed to any third party without our prior written consent.
Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation, and all copyright, patent, trade secret, trademark, and other intellectual property rights in the
System, shall remain our or our licensors' property. You shall not remove or alter any copyright or other proprietary rights notice on the System. We reserve
all rights not expressly granted.
4. LIMITED WARRANTY: (a) Limited Warranty. We warrant to you that, commencing on your receipt of a Product and terminating 1 year thereafter, the System
will perform substantially in accordance with its then-current appropriate Documentation. The Product (including replacements) may consist of new, used or
previously-installed components. (b) Remedies. If the System fails to comply with such warranty during such period, as your sole remedy, you must return
the same in compliance with our product return policy, and we shall, at our option, repair or replace the System, provide a workaround, or refund the fees you
paid. Replacement Systems are warranted for the original System's remaining warranty period. (c) Exclusions. EVALUATION SOFTWWARE IS LICENSED ON
AS-IS BASIS AND SUBJECT TO 4(d). We will have no obligation under this limited warranty due to: (i) negligence, misuse or abuse of the System, such as
unusual physical or electrical stress, misuse or accidents; (ii) use of the System other than in accordance with the Documentation; (iii) modifications,
alterations or repairs to the System made by a party other than us or our representative; (iv) the combination, operation or use of the System with equipment,
devices, software or data not supplied by us; (v) any third party hardware or Third Party Software, whether or not provided by us; (vi) any failure other than by
us to comply with handling, operating, environmental, storage or maintenance requirements for the System in the Documentation, including, without
limitation, temperature or humidity ranges. (d) Disclaimers. We are not responsible for your software, firmware, information, or data contained in, stored on,
or integrated with any Product returned to us for repair or replacement. SUCH LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF, AND WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM, ANY
AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. WE DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE
SYSTEM WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,
OBTAINED FROM US OR ELSEWHERE, WILL CREATE ANY WARRANTY NOT EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT. Some jurisdictions do not allow the

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 2

exclusion of implied warranties or limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, so such exclusions may not apply to you. In that event, such implied
warranties or limitations are limited to 60 days from the date you purchased the System or the shortest period permitted by applicable law, if longer. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which vary from state to state or country to country.
5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: WE AND OUR AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, LICENSORS, OR SALES CHANNELS ("REPRESENTATIVES") SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST
REVENUES, PROFITS OR SAVINGS, OR THE COST OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS, HOWEVER CAUSED, UNDER CONTRACT, TORT, BREACH OF WARRANTY,
NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF WE WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER
PROVISIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, WE AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES' TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE SYSTEM SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE TOTAL PAYMENTS TO US UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR THE SYSTEM. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS
SHALL NOT APPLY TO DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY TO PERSONS OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY IN ANY JURISDICTION WHERE APPLICABLE LAW
PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR BACKING UP YOUR DATA AND FILES, AND HEREBY RELEASE US AND OUR
REPRESENTATIVES FROM ANY LIABILITY OR DAMAGES DUE TO THE LOSS OF ANY SUCH DATA OR FILES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. CONFIDENTIALITY: Information in the System and the associated media, as well as the structure, organization and code of the Software, are proprietary to
us and contain valuable trade secrets developed or acquired at great expense to us or our suppliers. You shall not disclose to others or utilize any such
information except as expressly provided herein, except for information (i) lawfully received by the user from a third party which is not subject to
confidentiality obligations; (ii) generally available to the public without breach of this Agreement; (iii) lawfully known to the user prior to its receipt of the
System; or (iv) required by law to be disclosed.
7. SUPPORT: Updates, upgrades, fixes, maintenance or support for the System (an "Upgrade") after the limited warranty period may be available at separate
terms and fees from us. Any Upgrades shall be subject to this Agreement, except for additional or inconsistent terms we specify. Upgrades do not extend the
limited warranty period.
8. TERM; TERMINATION: The term of this Agreement shall continue unless terminated in accordance with this Section. We may terminate this Agreement at
any time upon default by you of the license provisions of this Agreement, or any other material default by you of this Agreement not cured with thirty (30)
days after written notice thereof. You may terminate this Agreement any time by terminating use of the System. Except for the first sentence of Section 2
("License") and for Section 4(a) ("Limited Warranty"), all provisions of this Agreement shall survive termination of this Agreement. Upon any such termination,
you shall certify in writing such termination and non-use to us.
9. EXPORT CONTROL: You agree that the Products and Software will not be shipped, transferred, or exported into any country or used in any manner
prohibited by the United States Export Administration Act or any other export laws, restrictions, or regulations (the "Export Laws"). You will indemnify, defend
and hold us harmless from any and all claims arising therefrom or relating thereto. In addition, if the Products or Software are identified as export controlled
items under the Export Laws, you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen, or otherwise located within, an embargoed nation (including without
limitation Iran, Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and Serbia) and that you are not otherwise prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the
Software. All rights to the Products and Software are granted on condition that such rights are forfeited if you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS: The Software and the documentation which accompanies the Software are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of "Commercial Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
§12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the
Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government as end users (a) only as
Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Harmonic, 4300 North
First Street, San Jose, CA 95134 U.S.A.
11. GENERAL: You shall not assign, delegate or sublicense your rights or obligations under this Agreement, by operation of law or otherwise, without our
prior written consent, and any attempt without such consent shall be void. Subject to the preceding sentence, this Agreement binds and benefits permitted
successors and assigns. This Agreement is governed by California law, without regard to its conflicts of law principles. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods is disclaimed. If any claim arises out of this Agreement, the parties hereby submit to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of
the federal and state courts located in Santa Clara County, California. In addition to any other rights or remedies, we shall be entitled to injunctive and other
equitable relief, without posting bond or other security, to prevent any material breach of this Agreement. We may change the terms, conditions and pricing
relating to the future licensing of our Systems and other intellectual property rights, including this Agreement, from time to time. No waiver will be implied
from conduct or failure to enforce rights nor effective unless in a writing signed on behalf of the party against whom the waiver is asserted. If any part of this
Agreement is found unenforceable, the remaining parts will be enforced to the maximum extent permitted. There are no third-party beneficiaries to this
Agreement. We are not bound by additional and/or conflicting provisions in any order, acceptance, or other correspondence unless we expressly agree in
writing. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties as to its subject matter and supersedes all proposals or
prior agreements, verbal or written, advertising, representations or communications concerning the System.
Every reasonable attempt has been made to comply with all licensing requirements for all components used in the system. Any oversight is unintentional and
will be remedied if brought to the attention of Harmonic at [email protected].

Documentation Conventions
This guide may use some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information. The following symbols appear throughout this guide:

DANGER: The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to
you.

CAUTION: The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can adversely affect
the performance of your Harmonic product, or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult.

LASER DANGER: The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in
this product that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to you.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 3

 NOTE: The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding. It
may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need, or it may provide
additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances.

IMPORTANT: The Important symbol calls your attention to information that should stand out when you are
reading product details and procedural information.

TIP: The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a
given procedure, but which, if followed, might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier, smoother, or
more efficient.

In addition to these symbols, this guide may use the following text conventions:

Convention Explanation

Typed Command Indicates the text that you type in at the keyboard
prompt.

<Ctrl>, <Ctrl>+<Shift> A key or key sequence to press.

Links The italics in blue text to indicate Cross-references, and

hyperlinked cross-references in online documents.

Bold Indicates a button to click, or a menu item to select.

ScreenOutput The text that is displayed on a computer screen.

Emphasis The italics text used for emphasis and document

references.

NOTE: You require Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat version 6.0 or later to open the PDF files. You can download
Adobe Reader free of charge from www.adobe.com.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 4

 Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Features and Specifications
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2 Main Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 2 Logging into ProStream 9000

2.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2 Full Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3 Logging into the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4 Setting/Changing a Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.5 Restoring a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning

3.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2 Web Client Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.1 ProStream Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.2.2 Stages of ProStream Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.2.3 Before you Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3 Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3.1 Setting ETH1-3 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.2 Viewing/Setting Chassis Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.3 Viewing/Setting Card Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.3.4 Global Platform Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.5 Managing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.3.6 Working with Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.4 What’s Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.5 Stream Config page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.5.1 Stream Config page Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.6 What’s Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.7 Configuring Input Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.7.1 Setting the Mode of Work of the Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.7.2 Configuring the Input ASI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.7.3 Configuring the Input GbE Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.8 Input Information (Extraction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.8.1 Viewing/Configuring Input Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.8.2 Input Properties section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.8.3 Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.9 Input TS Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.9.1 Enhanced TS Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.9.2 Input GbE Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.10 What’s Next... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Chapter 4 Output Configuration

4.1 Configuring Output Ports and Provisioning the ProStream . . . . . . 60

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 5 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 4.2 Defining Broadcasting Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.3 Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port Only . . . . . . . . 64
4.3.1 Configuring the Output Socket Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.4 Provisioning the Output TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.4.1 Configuring Delivery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.4.2 Regenerating DVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.4.3 Regenerating PSIP Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.4.4 TS Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.5 Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.5.1 Provisioning/Multiplexing a Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.5.2 Configuring BISS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.5.3 Reference Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.6 Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.6.1 Defining PID Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.7 What’s Next... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.8 Configuring the Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.8.1 Configuring an ASI Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.8.2 Configuring a GbE Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.9 8VSB Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding

5.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.2 Video Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.3 Video Transcoding Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.3.1 Transcoding an HD/SD Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.3.2 Transcoding a PIP Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.3.3 Defining Output Bitrate of a Transcoded Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.4 PCR and Video Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.5 Creating a Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3.6 Video Quality Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.3.7 EBP Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.3.8 Stream Conditioning for DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.3.9 Service CBR: Configuring Bitrate of Transcoded Stream at Service Level
119
5.4 Audio Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.4.1 Audio Transcoding Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.4.2 Audio Transcoding Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.4.3 Specific Codec Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.5 Audio Transcoding Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.5.1 Configuration Following the Output Stream Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding

6.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.1.2 HD/SD/Sub-SD Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.2 Processing Multiscreen Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 6 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 6.2.2 Setting Device Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.2.3 Transcoding Multiscreen Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Chapter 7 Splicing
7.1 Splicing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.2 DPI Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.3 DPI Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.4 Components of the Splicing Solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.4.1 Ad Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.4.2 Digital Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.5 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.5.1 Splicing Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.5.2 Ad Server Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.6 Configuring the Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.6.1 Defining Splicer-Ad Server Communication Parameters . . . . . . 162
7.7 Configuring the Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.7.1 Defining the Splicer Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.7.2 Defining the SCTE30 Port and Allocating Resources . . . . . . . . . 164
7.7.3 Synchronizing Splicer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7.7.4 Configuring Spliceable Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7.7.5 Configuring Data PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7.7.6 Configuring SCTE35 PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8 CAS
8.1 CAS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.2 Setting General CAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.2.1 Main CAS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.2.2 Setting EMMG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.3 What’s Next... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.4 Internal EIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.4.1 Using Internal EIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
8.5 BISS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.5.1 BISS Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.5.2 Configuring BISS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.6 Viewing SCGs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.7 Using a PSIG Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 9 Monitoring
9.1 Viewing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.1.1 Alarms Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9.1.2 Alarms History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.1 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Chapter 11 Additional Tools

11.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
11.2 Selecting IGMP Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 7 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 11.3 Setting Device Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
11.3.1 Network Time Protocol (NTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
11.3.2 Setting Device Time Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
11.4 Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
11.5 Defining HW Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
11.6 Defining the A/V Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
11.6.1 Defining the Set-Top-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
11.6.2 Defining ACE Video Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
11.6.3 Defining ACE Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
11.7 Configuring EAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
11.7.1 Configuring EAS Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
11.8 Defining SNMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
11.9 Video Inventory System (VIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
11.10 Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
11.10.1 Licensing System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
11.10.2 Supported Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
11.10.3 Working with Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
11.10.4 Licenses Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
11.10.5 License Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.11 Device Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.11.2 Configuring Device Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
11.11.3 Viewing Redundancy Group Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
11.11.4 Advanced Redundancy Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Chapter 12 Support
12.1 Support Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12.1.1 Command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Appendix A Loader Utility

A.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
A.2 Using the Loader Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Appendix B Standard ES Types and Descriptors

B.1 Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
B.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
B.3 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 8 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 1
Features and Specifications

1.1 Introduction
Harmonic ProStream 9000 is a highly integrated MPEG/DVB multiplexer, scrambler and
descrambler, for multimedia services carried over digital broadcast networks. It features a
modular, high-density chassis that is furnished with up to 5 IOMs (Input/Output Module) and
up to 4 IPCs (Internal Processing Card) in a single one-rack-unit (1-RU) chassis. The
modularity of the platform allows easy field replacement of cards, as well as field upgrades of
SW and HW features.
This guide describes the configuration and monitoring instructions for ProStream 9000, a
high density stream processing platform.

1.2 Main Features

The following table lists the main features of ProStream 9000. The functionality of ProStream
9000 depends on the installed IPC. ProStream 9000 functions as an encoder or transcoder
according to the installed IPC type.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 9 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 1 Features and Specifications Main Features

Table 1-1: Main Firmware Related Features

Category Feature Description

IP IOM  Dual GbE card

 Two independent ports per IP IOM
 line rate of 1 Gbps per IP IOM
 Maximum input and output bitrate is 500Mbps
per IP IOM
 Quad GbE card
 2 ports of 1Gbps, connector type - RJ45
 2 ports of 1Gbps, connector type SFP
 The ports can be used as:
 4 independent ports, or 2 pairs of redundant
ports (SFP to SFP and RJ45 to RJ45). Each pair
can be configured separately, in other words, one
Input and pair can be configured as redundant and one as
Output independent. The transition between modes is
Interfaces not service affecting for the primary port

ASI SCR IOM ASI-SCR - up to four ports per IOM

 Inputs and outputs DVB-ASI streams
 Supports Common Scrambling Algorithm scrambling
 May synchronize the device to an external clock
coming from a GPS receiver
 Bit rate:
 Maximum output bit rate of 187 Mbps
 Maximum input bit rate of 210 Mbps
 Supports packet size: 188 or 204 bytes

8VSB Up to four 8VSB input cards. See Table 4-8 on page 97.

Parsing Dynamic parsing of Extracts incoming feeds and displays their structure and
Tables input elements on the control interface. It displays their
bitrate, CC errors, SI PSI structure etc’.

Redundancy Input  GbE port redundancy

 Socket redundancy for each input socket
 Service redundancy

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 10 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 1 Features and Specifications Main Features

Table 1-1: Main Firmware Related Features

Category Feature Description

Multiplexing/  Maximum processing bit rate of 500 Mbps

provisioning options of  Full multiplexing (any input to any output)
the device  Multicast of any input stream to multiple transport
streams.
 Multicast of services with different transcoding
configuration
 IP multicast - supports IGMP ver 2/3
 Passing range of PIDs from any input to any output

DiviTrack over IP Statistical multiplexing - combines rate shaping using

external encoders

DiviTrackMX (HW Statistical multiplexing - combines rate shaping using

dependent, type of IPC) internal encoders

Processing Transcoding When transcoding modules are mounted:

(HW dependent, type of Transcodes incoming H264/MPEG2 programs and
IPC) outputs them as H264/MPEG2 CBR/VBR services.

Scrambling  Supports the following scrambling algorithm:

 DVB-CSA
 AES-NSA2 - for future use
 AES Fixed Key Control Word (CW) scrambling of
outgoing TS over IP - for future use
 BISS
 Selective Encryption
 Functions as scrambler and in AES-CBC scrambling
mode, also as de-scrambler. For future use only.
 Supports PSIG MUX protocol
 Supports ECMG redundancy
 Internal EIS

Transcoding Bit Rate Video

 VBR - in a pool
Output  CBR - For HD up to 3 services per pool for best
Bit Rate performances.
Audio
 CBR only

TS Mirroring TS Mirroring - Duplicates each output TS (master) from

any interface (IP, ASI) to any other TS (slave) in any
interface. Supports all master functions such as: rate
Output shaping, scrambling, RSS, tables generation, common
Monitoring PCR, PID range, DToIP.
IP Mirroring - Allows to duplicate all output data from
one port (GbE1) of an IP IOM card to the other port
(GbE2) of that card.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 11 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 1 Features and Specifications Main Features

Table 1-1: Main Firmware Related Features

Category Feature Description

SCT35 Insertion Receives an SNMP trap from SL 10 and generates an

SCT35 cue message

Table Generation  Create CAT

 Create SDT
 Create NIT

Table Re-generation  PSIP re-generation

 EIT re-generation

PID Prioritization In case of Over subscription, the ProStream 9000 starts

dropping PIDs according to their priority.

PID Range Allows to pass a range of PIDs from any input to any
Output output.
Capabilities Up to 16 PID ranges per unit.

Slate Any service can be configured to have an alternative, or

backup input feed or source that is enabled on the
output upon disruption of the primary feed. It allows
MSOs to inform their subscribers that they are doing
anything possible to restore the service.

Splicing Allows cable headends and broadcast affiliates to insert

locally-generated commercials and short programs into
remotely distributed regional programs before they are
delivered to home viewers.

Emergency Alert System Enable MSO to automatically broadcast emergency

(EAS) alert messages through pre-configured channels.

PCR Input PCR The PCR can arrive on any input PID, such as video,
audio or not on ES

Output PCR  The PCR can outflow on any PID. In transcoding,

only over video PID
 Generate PCR
 Common PCR

Management Management and  Control Panel

monitoring interfaces  Web client
 NMX (Harmonic's Digital Service Manager)

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 12 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 2
Logging into ProStream 9000

2.1 Overview
In order to enhance the security of ProStream 9000, the device has three access levels. Each
access level applies to any form of communication with the device whether it is a web client
or a Telnet session. Each access level offers a different mode of work with the device. The
following table lists the various access levels and the available working modes:

Access Level Working Mode

Monitor Allows only to monitor the operation of the device.

Configure Allows to configure the device only via a web client and to define
the monitor access level password.

The various access levels require a correct username and password combination.

Username Password

monitor monitor

configure configure

The current access level appears in the upper right hand corner of the web client.
Title bar User name

2.2 Full Device Configuration

The ProStream 9000 web client allows a full configuration of the device. It also allows the
user to monitor the ProStream 9000's status, view its alarms (if present), and troubleshoot
them. This manual describes and instructs you on how to configure and monitor the device
via the web client accessible through a web browser. The following table lists the web client
specifications:

Table 2-1: Web client Specifications

Parameter Explanation

Screen resolution 1280 x 1024

Supported web browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer

Versions 7, 8 and 9

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 13 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 2 Logging into ProStream 9000 Logging into the Device

NOTE: Once you open any of the supported browsers, clean the cash. The browser may save previous GUI
files. To clean cash, select Tools > Internet Options and in Browsing History click Delete.

TIP: After upgrading the firmware of a ProStream 9000 device, clean cash as explained in the note above.

2.3 Logging into the Device

The following instructions guide you on how to login via a web client.
1. In a browser, type in the address of the required device.
2. Click Login.
3. Type in the required username and password.
4. To save the password for the future, select Remember my password.
5. Click Ok.
The web client page appears and you may start working with the device according to the
restrictions of your access level.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 14 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 2 Logging into ProStream 9000 Setting/Changing a Password

2.4 Setting/Changing a Password

To change a password, you do not need to click Apply. Once you enter all required
information and click Change Password the new password is applied.
1. Select Tools > Password section.
2. If you logged in as Configure, you are authorized to change your password or the
password of Monitor. In this case, the User Name field appears and you need to select
either Monitor or Configure.
3. In Current User Password, enter the required password.
4. In New Password, enter the new password.
5. In Verify Password, re-enter the new password.
6. Click Change Password.
When logging in use the newly set password.
After three unsuccessful login trials, or if you forgot the password/user name, restore
your password. To restore the password, see the following section.

2.5 Restoring a Password

In case you forget your password, you can restore it. You have three trials to login to the
device. However, if you failed to log in, do the following:
1. Upon your failed trial to login, a screen appears with the Specific Data Number.

Specific Data Number

NOTE: The Specific Data Number is generated per each failed login.

2. Record this unique number and immediately contact Harmonic Customer Support and
provide customer support with the Specific Data Number.
Harmonic Customer Support personnel provides you with a temporary password.
3. Open your browser, and type the following:
http://<device IP address>/resetpass.htm
4. Click Go.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 15 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 2 Logging into ProStream 9000 Restoring a Password

5. The Connect To <IP Address> dialog appears:

6. In Username, type backdoor.

7. In Password, type the password you received from Harmonic Customer Support.
8. Once you logged into the device, set a password for future logins. See 2.4 Setting/
Changing a Password on page 15.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 16 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 3
Configuring and Provisioning

3.1 Overview
Once the ProStream 9000 is properly cabled and setup in your network, you may access it
via the web client in order to configure, provision and monitor it. The web client reads data
from the device and presents it in an easy to use User Interface (UI).
This chapter guides you on how to configure and multiplex a ProStream 9000 standalone
model using the web client.

NOTE: ProStream 9000 requires IE 7 and up.

3.2 Web Client Page

Title bar Input section Clock Logged in user Output section

Tabs bar

Input Properties
section Buttons section Output Properties section

The web client page includes the following sections:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 17 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Web Client Page

 Title bar - Indicates the ProStream model, its IP address, Alarm indicator, the current
logged in username and the Apply button.
 Tabs bar- Links you to parameters required for ProStream configuration and provisioning.
The available tabs are as follows:
 Platform - links you to the Platform page.
 Stream Config - links you to the Stream Config page.
 Status - links you to the Alarms page, the main monitoring page.
 Tools - allows you to set device time and required protocols
 CAS - links you to the CAS pages to configure CAS parameters and to view ECMs and
SCGs parameters.
 Support - links you to diagnostic information about the device
 Work area - Presents the parameters available for configuration and provisioning and
allows to configure and provision the ProStream. It is divided into two sections: Input and
Output. The work area changes according to the tab you have selected.
 Buttons section - Includes multiplexing buttons. See Multiplexing Buttons on page 27.
 Clock - located at the Title bar. It displays the time of the device in the following format:
mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm.

3.2.1 ProStream Monitoring

Monitoring the ProStream operation is very easy and straightforward. An alarm indicator is
displayed in the title bar of each one of the available Web client pages. The Alarm indicator is
actually a link to the Alarm page and the indicator provides the following information:

Table 3-1: Alarm Indicators

Alarm Indication Explanation

Green Alarm button No active alarms.

Red Alarm button There is at least one active alarm. Once the mouse
pointer hovers on it, a hint appears displaying the alarm
description. Once you click it, the Alarm page opens.

Red Alarm button There is at least one active warning. Once the mouse
pointer hovers on it, a hint appears displaying the alarm
description. Once you click it, the Alarm page opens.

N Active Alarms ‘N’ stands for the amount of registered alarms. Click the
link to open the Alarm page.

3.2.2 Stages of ProStream Configuration

Configuring the ProStream standalone model includes the following stages:
 ProStream Platform Parameters - configure Ethernet ports, slots and ASI port direction.
Usually, this configuration is a one time procedure performed as soon as you start
configuring the device. You can also view chassis and GbE port parameters and define
various global settings of the device.
 ProStream provisioning - during this stage you may read information from the device and
then multiplex it. Multiplexing is done mainly from the Stream Config page and includes
the following stages:
 Input configuration - enabling input ports and in case of GbE input port, setting port

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 18 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

and socket parameters.

 Reading data from the device (optional) - Web client displays the updated data as
read from the device.
 Output configuration and multiplexing - in case of GbE port, setting port and socket
parameters, setting TSs, services and PIDs parameters, arranging the output content
(multiplexing) and setting output port parameters and enabling the port.
 Scrambling/Descrambling - when ProStream functions as a scrambler/descrambler, set
communication parameters to allow communication between the device and the
Conditional Access System (CAS). You may also view other CAS parameters such as SCG,
ECM and EMM parameters.
When ProStream functions as a descrambler using the AES protocol, set the CWS
parameters. For future use only.
 Encoding - when ProStream functions as a re-encoder, set the re-encoding parameters.
Set these parameters via the Encoding tab.

3.2.3 Before you Begin

Before you start configuring and provisioning the device, pay attention to the following:
 Fields that are for viewing only, are greyed out.
 To change parameter values, click in the field and type the required values. Once you
click away from the field, the web client interface is updated and displays the new
parameters. However, the parameters are not sent to the device.
 Every web page dialog includes a Done button. When clicking this button, you save the
new configuration without applying it to the device and you close the web page dialog.
 To close a web page dialog without saving the configuration, click the button at the upper
right corner of each page.
 To send to the device the newly configured parameters, click Apply. Only when you click
Apply, you actually submit the new parameters to the device.
 To delete rows in a table, check the Select box and then click Delete Selected.

3.3 Platform Parameters

Configure the platform parameters when you start the device configuration. Usually it is a one
time procedure that you do via the Platform page. The Platform page is the default page, it
opens as soon as you link to the device:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 19 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

The Platform page is comprised of a graphical view of the ProStream back panel and as you
select each component, a table presenting its parameters appears. The table allows you to
configure and view various parameters.

3.3.1 Setting ETH1-3 Parameters

The IP address of the ETH3 port or ProStream primary IP address is configured as part of the
ProStream installation (see ProStream Installation and Start Up User’s Guide). However, when
required, you may change the IP address settings via the Platform screen, Ethernet table:

 To change configuration of ETH1, ETH2 and ETH3

NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH3 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports
to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. ProStream uses the
ETH3 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access
Systems (CAS) purposes.

1. In Platform, select the required Ethernet port.

2. In the table that appears, type the required IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.
3. Click Apply to apply changes.
4. In case you configured ETH3, login to the new IP address.

NOTE: The MAC address is the physical address of the unit. The address is retrieved and presented in the
Platform page for viewing purposes only.

3.3.2 Viewing/Setting Chassis Parameters

1. Select the Platform tab.
2. Select Chassis/Main Card.
3. In the Chassis Properties table, view the following chassis parameters:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 20 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

SW Version - indicates the firmware version.

RAM Size - indicates the RAM size of the device. In this case the chassis supports 1Giga
RAM.
Chassis Serial Number - the serial number of the chassis.
Hardware Revision - the revision of the Central Processing Card.
Internal Part Number - indicates hardware configuration.
Chassis Type - indicates chassis type.
Part Number - customer part number.
Boot Version - indicates the boot flash version.
CPC Part Number - part number of the CPC card and its version.
Midplane Part Number - indicates the part number and revision.
Unit Name - type in the required device name.

3.3.3 Viewing/Setting Card Parameters

1. Select the Platform tab.
2. Select the required slot. Each slot provides the following information:

View slot information

Slot # - the number of the slot as in the back panel of the device.
Slot # list - allows you to select another IOM card when required.
Actual - indicates the IOM card that is currently mounted in the slot.

Table 3-2: Actual IOM Card

Icon of
Explanation
Actual Card

ASI IOM card

ASI SCR IOM card

Dual GbE card

Quad GbE card

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 21 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

Table 3-2: Actual IOM Card

Icon of
Explanation
Actual Card

8VSB card. For future use only.

3. To select the required card in the slot, open the Slot # list, and select the required card:
 None - no IOM card in the slot
 ASI SCR - ASI IOM with scrambling support
 Dual GbE card - GbE 1G IOM card
 Quad GbE card - GbE 4G IOM card
 8VSB card. See 8VSB Modulation on page 97.
The Card# Properties table is updated to display the following:
For ASI SCR IOM Card - view or set the required port direction.

View properties

Set port direction

For a Quad GbE card/Dual GbE card - in the Card# Properties table, view the type, serial
number and the part number of the card.

For 8VSB card - in the Card# Properties table, view the type, serial number and the part
number of the card.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 22 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

3.3.4 Global Platform Configuration

The Auxiliaries section allows you to apply global platform configuration according to the
following explanations:
 To identify unit
 In Platform under Auxiliaries, click Identify Unit.
The Local LED on the ProStream front and back panel turns on and the button toggles to
Stop Identify.
 To reset the unit
1. In Platform under Auxiliaries, click Reset Unit.
2. Confirm the action by clicking OK.
3. Wait until the procedure is complete.
 To clear configuration
1. In Platform under Auxiliaries, click Clear Configuration.
2. Confirm the action by clicking Ok.
The previous configuration is removed and the device boots up with the default
configuration.
 To download the Loader utility
1. In Platform under Auxiliaries, click Loader Utility.
2. Navigate to the location of your choice and click Save.
3. The Loader utility is saved to the required location and you may start using it.
 To manage software versions
In Platform under Auxiliaries, click Manage Software. For detailed information and instructions,
refer to Managing Software on page 24.
 To access a wizard
 Click Wizards to open the Wizards page. See Working with Wizards on page 25.
 To verify that Validation system is active
By default a validation system is active when using the web client. The validation system is
checking the validity of the newly entered values. It is strongly recommended to configure
and provision the device with the Validation box selected.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 23 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

3.3.5 Managing Software

The Software Management page allows you to do the following:

 Transfer and install an updated version

 Change the running software - Up to two versions of the software package may reside on
the ProStream device. Usually, the current installed version and the previous installed
version. You may change the running software as required.
 To transfer and install an updated firmware version
1. From Harmonic FTP site, download the zipped folder of the updated version.
2. Unzip the folder.
3. In Platform, in Auxiliaries, click Manage Software.

The Software Management dialog appears.

4. Click Install Software Package.
The Transfer Software dialog appears.
5. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the unzipped folder and select the file of the
following format:xx.xx.xx.xxx (the file does not have an extension.)
6. Click Transfer.
A message appears notifying that the transfer may take a few minutes.
7. Click Ok.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 24 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

The selected package is transferred and installed on the device. Progress bars and
flashing messages appear indicating the stages and progress of the version transfer and
installation.

CAUTION: During software transfer leave the Internet Explorer open and do not reset the device. Either
action may cause the device to hang without a valid firmware for booting up.

Once the transfer is complete, a message appears asking you whether the device should
run with the newly transferred version.
8. Click Ok.
A message appears asking you whether to reset.
9. Click Ok to reset and run the device with the newly transferred version.
A message appears asking you whether to close the web client.
10. Click Yes to close the web client page. This is the recommended option.
If you click No, the web client page stays open during reset, but it cannot read data from
the device to display updated information.
11. Wait a few minutes until reset is complete and open the web client page.

 To organize the loaded software versions

1. In Platform, click Manage Software.
The Software Management dialog appears.
2. Open the Software Version list to select the required version.
3. Do either of the following:
 To select a version to be installed after reset, click Select. A message appears
notifying you that the selection completed successfully and asking you whether to
reset the device. Once you click Ok, the device reboots to run with the newly selected
version.
 To remove a version from the device, click Remove.

NOTE: You can have up to three software versions loaded on the device.

3.3.6 Working with Wizards

The built-in wizards streamline the configuration of the following:
 Routing a large number of sockets
 To select and use a wizard
1. In the web client page, select Platform.
2. Under Auxiliaries, click Wizards.
3. Open the Wizards list and select:
 SPTS Socket Routing Configuration - for routing input SPTS sockets to output SPTS
sockets.
4. Enter the required parameters.
5. Click Run to process the configuration This process may take a few seconds.
6. Click Apply to send the configuration to the device.
7. To return to the Platform page, click the Platform tab.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 25 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning What’s Next

3.4 What’s Next

To continue with the configuration, familiarize yourself with the Stream Config page. The
Stream Config page allows you to continue with the configuration.

3.5 Stream Config page

The Stream Config page enables to view the input and output ports and to configure them.
The page reflects the cards mounted in the device ProStream and reads and displays data
from the input ports. The following figure shows the Stream Config page:

Input section Output section

Input Properties section Multiplexing buttons Output Properties section

The Stream Config page always includes the following sections:

 Input section - displays the input ports according to the mounted card and allows to
update the display by reading the current input from the input ports.
 Input Properties section - allows to enable a port and to configure the port’s settings. This
section changes according to the item selected in the Input section.
 Output section - displays the available output ports and their provisioned output TSs.
 Output Properties - allows to configure the output ports, TSs, services and PIDs.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 26 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Stream Config page

 Multiplexing buttons:

Table 3-3: Multiplexing Buttons

Button Button Name Selected Output Parameter

Add to Output from input Any beside PID Allocation

Remove from Output Any beside PID Allocation

New Service Any beside PID Allocation

New PID Any beside PID Allocation

PID Range - moves a PID Any beside PID Allocation

range from the input to the
output

New Reference Service Any beside PID Allocation

New ECM PID Allocation

New EMM PID Allocation

New ECM PID Hierarchy, TS, audio/video

PID

New EMM PID Allocation

New Pool Any beside PID Allocation

ReAlloc TransEngines - to Hierarchy

optimize transcoding
performance following the
Could not Allocate
Transcoding Unit alarm.

View Input - click to view Service and audio/video PID

input extraction of object
selected in output.

New Service In - click to Select a TS in the Input

create a service in the section.
input. Toggles to Delete
Service In when the
service is selected in the
input.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 27 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Stream Config page

NOTE: Once you read input information and then open another page, read input information again when
reopening the Stream Config page.

3.5.1 Stream Config page Conventions

The following table lists the icons used in the Stream Config page and the information
provided next to the icon:

Table 3-4: Stream Config Conventions

Icon Explanation Additional Info.

Arrowhead is yellow - active Port

Arrowhead is grey - inactive Port.

The port type name is italicized.
(ASI, GbE)

Transport Stream (TS) TS ID and either of the following:

GbE - (IP:UDP) index #
ASI - (# of services)

Descrambled Transport Stream TS ID and either of the following:

(TS) GbE - (IP:UDP) index #
ASI - (# of services)

TS Mirror This TS is mirroring another TS

Pool For future use. Pool ID and its bit rate

Multiplexed ECM PID number

EMM PID PID number

Video PID PID number

Audio PID. PID number

Audio PID of type MPEG1L2, PID number

usually ES 0x3/4

Audio PID of type AC3, usually ES PID number

0x81

SCTE35 PID PID number

Private Data PID, Ghost PID, or PID number

Range of PIDs

PID allocation for ECMs and

EMMs

PCR PID PID number

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 28 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning What’s Next

Table 3-4: Stream Config Conventions

Icon Explanation Additional Info.

Service, Reference Service Service name and ID

Re-encoded service Service name and ID

Scrambled service Service name and ID

Transcoded service in a pool Service name and ID and pool name

3.6 What’s Next

Now you are ready to start configuring the ProStream unit and provision services through it.

NOTE: GbE input/output port should be configured before provisioning services through the port.

3.7 Configuring Input Ports

ProStream devices may have GbE and/or ASI input ports. Each port may be individually
enabled or disabled. The configuration of the input ports is done through the Stream Config
page.
The Input port configuration consists of the following stages:
 Set port mode of work - applicable only to GbE ports.
 Enable/disable ports - applicable to all types of input ports.
 Set port parameters - applicable to GbE ports only.
 Set socket parameters - applicable to GbE ports only.
 Read the current information from input ports. (optional)

3.7.1 Setting the Mode of Work of the Port

1. In the Input section, select a GbE card.
The Main section is updated accordingly.

2. Open the Ports Usage list and select one of the methods for using the GbE input ports.
Ports may work independently or in a redundancy mode. The redundancy modes are
listed in table Table 3-5 on page 30.
Note the following regarding port redundancy:
 By default, port 1 is the primary port and port 2 of the same IOM module is the
backup port.
 Triggers of port redundancy switch are: Link down, SFP missing, CRC error.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 29 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

The following table lists the supported redundancy modes:

Table 3-5: GbE Input Redundancy modes

Parameter Explanation

Independent Ports Each port receives another feed.

Manual The redundancy switch is performed manually. The Active Port

parameter appears and you can set the active port.

Automatic The redundancy switch is performed automatically upon port

failure. Once the primary is faulty, the device automatically switches
to the backup port and continues receiving content over this port
unless it is faulty. The device switches to the primary port only
when the backup fails.

Manual Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically upon port

failure. However, switching back to the primary, when fixed, is
performed manually.
To revert back to the primary port, you should change the Port
Usage to Automatic. Once the primary port is active, change Port
Usage to Manual Revert.

Automatic Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically upon port

failure. However, the device automatically switches to the primary
when the primary has stabilized and even though the backup is still
in order. The baseline is that the primary is preferred.

3.7.2 Configuring the Input ASI Ports

NOTE: Prior to configuration, define whether the ASI port is an input or output port. See Viewing/
Setting Card Parameters on page 21. By default the port is an input port.

1. In the Input section, select a port.

The Main section is updated accordingly.

2. ‘To enable the port, select Enable Port.

TIP: Enable the port only once port configuration is complete.

3. In Description, edit the default description.

4. In Packet Size, select the required packet size.
You may select 188 (default) or 204 or Auto. In the latter, the ProStream automatically
detects the packet size.
In case of scrambling over ASI, you may select 188 (default) and 204 only.
5. In Port Type, usually Regular Port appears.
6. Click Apply.
The port is enabled and its data may flow into the device.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 30 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

3.7.3 Configuring the Input GbE Ports

1. In the Input section, select a port.
The Main tab is updated accordingly.

2. To enable the port, select Enable Port.

TIP: Enable the port only once port configuration is complete.

3. In Disable on No Stream - if selected, when no stream is detected at the port, automatically

port shifts to Link Down. Once stream is detected, port automatically shifts to Link Up.
4. In Description, edit the default description.
5. Do one of the following:
 To configure the port, click Port Configuration. See GbE Port Configuration on
page 31.
 To configure the socket, click Sockets Configuration. See Socket Configuration on
page 33.
6. Click Apply.
The port is enabled and its data may flow into the device.

TIP: The following sections are relevant to GbE port only.

3.7.3.1 GbE Port Configuration

Configure the GbE input port according to the following provided instructions:
 To set Port definitions - GbE ports only
1. Select the Input GbE port.
2. In Input Properties, click Port Configuration.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 31 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

The following dialog appears:

3. Configure and view the port parameters according to the following:

 IP Address - type in the required IP address.
 Subnet Mask - type in the required subnet mask.
 Gateway - type in the IP address of the gateway.
 Route1 IP Address - type in the required IP address.
 Route1 Subnet Mask - type in the required subnet mask.
 Route2 IP Address - type in the required IP address.
 Route2 Subnet Mask - type in the required subnet mask.
 MAC Address - (Read only) view the physical address of the GbE as retrieved from
the device.
 SFP Vendor - (Read only) view the vendor of the SFP module mounted in the GbE
port.
 SFP mode - (Read only) view the mode of the SFP module mounted in the GbE.
 SFP type - (Read only) view the type of SFP mounted. It can be either SX - usually
used for short distances (up to 200 m) or LX - usually used for long distances (10km
and up).
 Auto Negotiation - The Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links.
Select this check box to activate the Auto Negotiation protocol only if the other end
of the GbE link also uses auto negotiation.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 32 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

 Under Advanced Options, configure the following:

 TX Only - in case of a single direction link, select to define the port as a transmitting
port.
 Inter Packet Gap - Applies to GbE output ports only. Enter the required internal
packet gap. The minimum allowed gap is 12 ticks. If the gap is less than 12, the alarm
The Inter Packet Gap is below 12 ticks is raised.
 Loopback Mode - select in case you wish to loopback the port, that is the data is sent
back to the input port.
4. Click Done to save the new configuration.

3.7.3.2 Socket Configuration

Content transmission of Video-over-IP utilizes sockets. Each socket is a terminal for a TS. The
socket is defined by a unique combination of destination IP address and UDP port.
You may add up to 128 sockets with up to eight MPTS (Multi Protocol Transport Services)
sockets. Each MPTS socket may stream up to 32 services.

NOTE: To change socket type (SPTS, MPTS), delete the socket and reconfigure with the new socket type.

You may add sockets either one by one or multiple sockets in one step. In addition, you may
delete sockets at any time.

Socket IP Address
When defining the IP address of a socket, follow the information provided below:

Table 3-6:

Type Class Available Range

Unicast A 1.0.0.0 - 126.255.255.255

Unicast B 128.0.0.0 - 191.255.255.255

Unicast C 192.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.255

Multicast D 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255

NOTE: The following reserved ranges should not be used:

reserved 224.0.0.0 - 224.0.0.255,
reserved for administration 239.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255

 To set socket definitions - GbE ports only

1. In the Input Properties section, click Sockets Configuration.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 33 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

The Sockets Configuration dialog appears:

NOTE: This dialog is furnished with an horizontal and vertical scroll bars. To view the vertical scroll bar,
scroll with the horizontal one to the right most side of the dialog. Scroll the horizontal one to view all
configured sockets.

2. Do either of the following:

Edit the parameters of the required sockets according to the explanation below ( Defining
Socket Parameters.
Or,
Add a socket as explained in Adding a Socket or Multiple Sockets on page 35.

Defining Socket Parameters

Define the socket parameters as follows:
 Sel - click to select the socket prior to using any of the buttons of the dialog.
 IP Address - enter an IP as explained in Socket IP Address on page 33.
 Port - enter a port number. The available range is 1- 65535.
 Encapsulation Mode - select one of the following:
 UDP - according to the transmitter/receiver
 RTP - according to the transmitter/receiver. If FEC is used, select RTP
 HRTP - to receive a socket encapsulated in Harmonic RTP to allow connection
between ProStream 9000 devices.
 TCP - Input only. It applies to data with low rate that is transmitted over TCP
 TS Mode - select one the following:
 MPTS
 SPTS
 Data - see ADI Application Note.
 CAS DATA

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 34 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

 FEC - relates to the extra data that is sent on a separate socket(s) and includes the
number of rows and columns to be calculated. Higher number of rows and columns,
yields a higher overhead and a better error correction ability. Define the FEC parameters
as follows:

Option Explanation

No FEC No Forward Error Correction is applied

Pro-MPEG Annex B/SMPE 2022 Annex C FEC standard. Select to read input with FEC
data

 Descramble - select for Fixed Key descrambling. You can also configure this field in the
Input Properties of a TS. When you select in the Descramble tab the Fixed Key option, this
field is selected automatically
 Bitrate - enter the required bit rate.

Adding a Socket or Multiple Sockets

The following table lists the available methods for adding a socket:

Table 3-7: Adding a Socket

Button Explanation

Adds a single socket with the last socket

configuration with an incremented IP address

Adds a single socket with the last socket

configuration with an incremented port number

Adds a single socket or multiple sockets

1. In the Socket Configuration page, click Add Socket.

The Add sockets page appears.

2. To add a single socket, do the following:

a. Define the IP Address (see Socket IP Address on page 33) and the port number.
a. Click Done.
The socket is added to the list. Continue the configuration as explained in Defining
Socket Parameters on page 34.
3. To add multiple sockets, select Add Multiple Sockets.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 35 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

b. Select Add Multiple Sockets.

The Num of Ports parameter is added to the table.

a. Define the IP Address (see Socket IP Address on page 33) and the UDP port.
a. In Num of IPs, enter the amount of IPs you wish to add.
a. In Num of Ports, enter the amount of UDP ports you wish to add.
a. Click Done.
Multiple sockets are added to the list. Continue the configuration as explained in
Defining Socket Parameters on page 34.

Adding a Single Socket with Incremented Port Number

 In the Socket Configuration page, click Duplicate Last Socket (Inc Port).
The configuration of the last socket is duplicated and is the configuration of the newly
added socket. The port number of the newly added socket is incremented by one.

Newly added socket with same configuration as

previous one and an incremented port number

Adding a Single Socket with Incremented IP Address

 In the Socket Configuration page, click Duplicate Last Socket (Inc IP).
The configuration of the last socket is duplicated and is the configuration of the newly
added socket. The IP address of the newly added socket is incremented by one.

Newly added socket with same configuration as

previous one and an incremented IP address

Now you are ready to enable the GbE port as explained in Configuring the Input ASI Ports on
page 30.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 36 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

 To edit the socket list

1. To delete a socket, check the Select box of a socket you wish to cancel.
2. Click Delete Selected.
The required socket is deleted.

3.8 Input Information (Extraction)

 To read/refresh input information from the Input port
 To refresh input information, click Refresh Input Information.
The display is updated as the application retrieves the information. When this is the first
time you are reading information the icon appears next to the port to indicate that you
may look at its content.

3.8.1 Viewing/Configuring Input Information

Both Input and Input Properties sections provide information on the input stream.

3.8.1.1 Input section

The Input section provides a general view of the input stream and you may drill down a slot to
view its components, that is the mounted card. Drill down the card to view its components.

 To view the Slot components

 Click, next to the required slot.
The components of the slot, that is the mounted card appear.
 To view the Card components
 Click, next to the required card.
The components of the card, that is the ports appear. You can also configure port usage,
see Setting the Mode of Work of the Port on page 29.
 To view the Port components
 Click, next to the required port.
The components of the port, that is the TSs appear.
Usually, each port appears with its port number and bit rate in kbps. If you drill down a
port you may view its TSs.
 To view the components of a TS
 Click, next to the required TS/service.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 37 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

The components of the TS/service appear. If you drill down a service you may view its
PIDs. In case the TS includes PSIP tables, the PIDs of the PSIP tables appear as ghost
PIDs. The ghost PID 0x1FFB always appears and the appearance of the other ghost PIDs
depends on the PSIP data.
Usually TSs appear with their ID number, for GbE port - socket, and number of services
included in the TS.

GbE Port - TS

ASI Port - TS

However TSs may be disabled or unknown as the following table lists:

Table 3-8: TS Information at the Input Port

TS Status Explanation

Enabled TS appears with ID number.

ASI port - also number of services and bitrate
GbE port - also socket information, number of
services, bitrate and TS index number

Disabled The port is disabled. Also TS services are disabled.

Unknown Port is enabled and data is flowing in, however

ProStream cannot extract input data.

NOTE: In case of an ASI input/output port, the Input/Output section allows you to set the packet size.
See, Configuring the Input ASI Ports on page 30.

3.8.2 Input Properties section

The Input Properties section provides essential information on an item selected in the Input
section. This information is read only and may help you while provisioning the output stream.
The following tables list the information displayed in the Input Properties according to the
selected item in the Input section:

3.8.2.1 GbE Card

Define the Port Usage, see Setting the Mode of Work of the Port on page 29.

3.8.2.2 ASI Port Information

See Configuring the Input ASI Ports on page 30.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 38 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

3.8.2.3 GbE Information

See Configuring the Input GbE Ports on page 31.

3.8.2.4 ASI TS Information

When you select a TS in the Input section and the TS flows into the device over an ASI port,
the following information appears in the Input Properties section:

Table 3-9: ASI TS EXtraction

Parameter Explanation

TS ID The ID number of the selected TS.

PAT Version The PAT’s (Program Association Table) version

identification. This version is incremented every
time the PAT’s data is changed.

NIT PID The PID of the Network Information Table.

Extract. Mode Allows you to select the requested extraction.

See Selecting Extraction Mode on page 42.

Show CC Errors Whether to show Continuity Counter errors,

select one of the following options:
 Always
 Never
 Passed through PIDs

3.8.2.5 GbE TS Extraction

When you select a TS in the Input section and the TS flows in the device over a GbE port, the
following information appears in the Input Properties section:
 General tab

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 39 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

Table 3-10: GbE TS Extraction - General tab

Parameter Explanation

TS ID The ID number of the selected TS.

PAT Version The PAT’s (Program Association Table) version identification. This
version is incremented every time the PAT’s data is changed.

NIT PID The PID of the Network Information Table.

TS Name Enter a name for the TS. You can enter up to 40 characters. Once
you click anywhere in the General tab, the name is updated in the
tree view. The name appears as follows: TS <TS Name>-<TS ID>

TS Name

Extract. Mode Allows you to select the requested extraction. See Selecting
Extraction Mode on page 42

TS-Mode Allows you to select the requested TS mode: SPTS, MPTS, or Data

Show CC Errors For Continuity Counter errors, select one of the following options:
Always
Never
For Passed PIDs Only

Elapsed Time for Define, in seconds, the elapsed time between detecting a
Socket Fail problem in the input port and raising the Socket Fail alarm.

FEC Indicates FEC parameters when configured to read input with FEC
parameters. See Defining Socket Parameters on page 34.

De-Jittering Select to recover video directly from the jittered and noisy frames.
De-Jittering should be unchecked for:
 CAS Data IP input TS.

Bitrate Applies to TS-Mode Data only. Enter the required input bitrate.

Delay Available when IP Transport Type is Data Specifies a delay for the
data stream (PID) for the purpose of synchronizing subtitles. The
range is 0 to 7000 milliseconds. The default is 0 (no delay).

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 40 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

 Descramble tab

Table 3-11: GbE TS Extraction - De-scramble tab

Parameter Explanation

No Descrambling select when De-scrambling is not required

CWS Usage select in AES application. For future use only.

Fixed Key Usage select when fixed key is required. For future use
only.

 Primary

Table 3-12: GbE TS Extraction - Primary tab

Parameter Explanation

Socket IP Enter the IP address of the socket

Socket UDP Enter the required UDP

Encapsulation Mode Select the required encapsulation mode

FEC Select whether to read input with FEC.

See Defining Socket Parameters on page 34.

SSM Source Specific Multicast. This feature allows you to define

up to four different sources for the TS by entering the IP
address of the upstream transmitting devices. This feature
is relevant only when working in GMPv3.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 41 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

 Backup

Backup socket should have the same content as the primary socket. However, primary and
backup can have different Encapsulation mode, FEC and a set of SSM addresses.

NOTE: You can define a backup socket on the same port as the primary or on a different port but it
should be on the same IOM module.

Table 3-13: GbE TS Extraction - Backup tab

Parameter Explanation

Socket IP Enter the IP address of the backup socket

Socket UDP Enter the required UDP

Encapsulation Mode Select the required encapsulation mode

FEC Select whether to read input with FEC.

See Defining Socket Parameters on page 34.

SSM Source Specific Multicast. This feature allows you to define

up to four different sources for the TS by entering the IP
address of the upstream transmitting devices. This feature
is relevant only when working in GMPv3.

Backup Scr From  Same Physical Port - primary and backup sockets are
on the same physical port
 Other Physical Port - primary and backup ports are on
different ports of the same IOM module

3.8.2.6 Selecting Extraction Mode

1. In Input, select a TS.
2. In Input Properties, select the required extraction mode:
 Disable - no extraction is available
 Ghosts only - displays all PIDs of the TS as ghost PIDs.
 PSI only - extracts the PAT PMT and CAT tables.
 PSI + SI - extracts the PAT, PMT, CAT, SDT and NIT tables.
 PSIP - extracts the supported PSIP tables.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Refresh Input.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 42 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

The TS appears with the required extraction mode.

3.8.3 Service Information

When you select a service in the Input section, the following information appears in the Input
Properties section:

3.8.3.1 Service Extraction - Main Tab

Table 3-14: Service Extraction - Main tab

Parameter Explanation

Name The service name as extracted from the Service Description

Table (SDT).

Service ID The service identification number.

PMT PID The PID over which the service’s PMT (Program Map Table) is
transmitted.

PMT Version The PMT’s version identification. This version is incremented

every time the PMT’s data is changed (e.g. the Video PID
changes).

PCR PID The PID of the service’s PCR (Program Clock Reference).

Source ID A PSIP parameter

Descriptors Any additional information regarding the service. This field

appears either as a link or disabled (gray and italicized).

Configurable Service Select to display the Configurable Service parameters. This

section applies to a unit that functions as an Edge Descrambler
Unit (EDU). See, EDU Software User Guide.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 43 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

3.8.3.2 Service Extraction - Event Tab

This tab displays events

3.8.3.3 Viewing Descriptors

A descriptor includes additional information regarding the service. To view the descriptor
associated with the input component, see the following instructions:
 To view the descriptor
1. Select the Descriptor tab. The following page dialog appears:

2. View the descriptor details.

All descriptors appear in a hex-decimal format.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 44 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

3.8.3.4 PID Information

Table 3-15: PID Extraction

Parameter Explanation

PID Indicates the PID number

PID Type The type of data carried over a specific elementary stream

Scrambled Indicates whether scrambled

Descriptors Any additional information regarding the PID. To view the PID
descriptor, select the Descriptor tab. The tab is enabled if a
descriptor is associated with the PID. For further information, refer
to Viewing Descriptors on page 44.

3.8.3.5 ECM Information

NOTE: ECM information is irrelevant when using Fixed Key.

Table 3-16: ECM Extraction

Parameter Explanation

PID Indicates the PID number

PID Type The type of data carried over a specific elementary stream.

Scrambled Indicates that this is a scrambled PID as the CA descriptor indicates.

CAS ID 16 bit CAS vendor ID.

3.9 Input TS Protection

ProStream 9000 supports the following input TS protection:
 Enhanced TS protection. See Enhanced TS Protection on page 45.
 Input GbE protection. See Input GbE Protection on page 53.

3.9.1 Enhanced TS Protection

The input TS protection, allows any to any source redundancy. For any input, you can
configure up to five backup TS or port sources across all input modules. For example, ASI
port redundant to IP socket, ASI receiver redundant to IP socket, etc'.
Backup sources are prioritized from 1 - highest to 5 - lowest. Upon redundancy switch the
device always tries to switch to the highest priority source which is in order.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 45 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

For input TS over GbE port, also socket redundancy is available. If, TS protection is enabled,
only TS protection is available and other internal platform redundancy types are not available.
For socket redundancy, see Input GbE Protection on page 53

Enhanced redundancy is
selected

Configuring TS protection includes the following stages:

 Configuring a primary and a backup source, TS (socket) or port.
Backup should have the same content as the primary TS.
You can define a backup source on the same port as the primary if over IP, or on a
different port and on a different IOM module.
 Selecting the required redundancy mode. The following table lists the available modes:

Table 3-17: Input TS Redundancy modes

Parameter Explanation

None No redundancy is required

Manual The redundancy switch is performed manually

Automatic The redundancy switch is performed automatically

according to the predefined triggers.
The device automatically switches between
primary and backup according to their activation
status and backup priority. Switching from the
active one to the none active occurs upon failure
of the active one and while the none active is in
order. Once primary source is fixed, the device
does not revert to the primary as in Automatic
Revert. Backup will remain active and it's
redundant source will be the primary once it is
fixed.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 46 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

Table 3-17: Input TS Redundancy modes

Parameter Explanation

Manual Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically

according to the predefined triggers. The device
automatically switches between primary and
backup according to backup activation status and
backup priority. However, switching back to the
primary, when fixed, is performed manually.

Automatic Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically

according to the predefined triggers. However,
the device automatically switches to the source
with the higher priority when the source is
stabilized and even though the source with lower
priority is still in order. The baseline is that the
higher priority and primary are preferred. For each
trigger you can define the stabilized time. See
Table 3-19 on page 53.

 Defining redundancy triggers per TS. When the source flows in over an 8VSBS, the
triggers are limited to Source Not Active.
 In case you select Automatic revert, configure stabilization time per redundancy trigger.

NOTE: For related alarms, see Troubleshooting on page 185.

3.9.1.1 Configuring Redundancy for Input TS - Manual Mode

1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. In the Input section, select the required TS and the Redundancy tab.
4. For input TS over GbE port, select Enhanced Redundancy. If not enabled, socket
redundancy is available. You can tick the Enhanced Redundancy only when the Mode is
set to None.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 47 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

5. Open the Mode list and select Manual.

Select the redundancy tab

Input TS
over ASI/
8VSB Open the Mode list and select
Manual

Select the redundancy tab

Input TS
over GbE

Open the Mode list and select Select Enhanced Redundancy

Manual

In the Redundancy tab, the following takes place:

Mode is Manual View the currently Select the active

activated port socket

 The Active list is currently populated with Primary only. Once you define backup
sources, it is populated with these sources as well.
 The Backup tab appears
6. Select the Backup tab and configure the backup sources.

a. Open the Num of Backups list and select the required number of backups. You can
select up to five backup sources. 
The Backup Sources section appears.

b. Backup Source lists are populated with all input TSs. Open the list for each backup
source and select the required source.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 48 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

7. Click Apply.
8. In case the primary failed, do the following:
a. Select Redundancy tab.
b. The Active list is populated with the configured backup sources. Open the Active list
and select the required backup source to be active.
9. Click Apply.

3.9.1.2 Configuring Redundancy - Automatic Mode

When selecting the Automatic mode, configure the triggers for the redundancy switch.
By default, the alarm Source Not Active is always a trigger. You can view the elapsed time
between detecting a problem in the input port and raising the Source Fail alarm. To configure
this threshold, see Table 3-18 on page 50.
For other triggers, define whether to activate them as triggers for the redundancy switch and
the threshold for the redundancy switch.
The Bitrate Underflow and the Scrambled A/V triggers raise an alarm only when they are
enabled triggers.
 To configure redundancy Automatic mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. In the Input section, select the required socket and the Redundancy tab.
4. For input TS over GbE port, select Enhanced Redundancy. If not enabled, socket
redundancy is available. You can tick the Enhanced Redundancy only when the Mode is
set to None.
5. Open the Mode list and select Automatic.

Select the redundancy tab

Open the Mode list and select

Manual

In the Redundancy tab, the following takes place:

View the currently

activated source

Configure the
triggers

 Indication of the activate source appears

 The Backup tab appears
 Triggers section appears
6. View the currently activate source.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 49 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

7. In Failover Window of Source not Active, enter the required threshold time in seconds.
8. For each trigger, enable/disable it, if enabled, set the threshold time in seconds. The
following table lists the available triggers and provides important information per trigger:

Table 3-18: TS Protection - Triggers for TS Redundancy

Trigger Explanation

Bitrate Underflow Default threshold is 5 seconds.

If for five seconds, the bitrate is lower than the minimum
expected bitrate, a redundancy switch will take place.

Missing PAT Default threshold is 2 seconds.

Missing PMT This trigger requires also PAT missing as a trigger.

CC Err Default threshold is 60 seconds and default number of

errors is 4. For example, if during 60 seconds four counter
errors occurred, a redundancy switch takes place.

Scrambled A/V Based on Scrambling Counter Bits for the routed A/V PIDs
only.

9. Select the Backup tab and configure the backup sources.

a. Open the Num of Backups list and select the required number of backups. You can
select up to five backup sources. 
The Backup Sources section appears.

b. Backup Source lists are populated with all input TSs. Open the list for each backup
source and select the required source.
10. Click Apply.

3.9.1.3 Configuring Redundancy - Manual Revert Mode

When selecting the Manual Revert mode, configure the triggers for the redundancy switch.
After a redundancy switch, if you wish to revert to the primary socket, change the mode to
Manual and revert, as explained below:
 To configure redundancy manual revert mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. In the Input section, select the required socket and the Redundancy tab.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 50 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

4. For input TS over GbE port, select Enhanced Redundancy. If not enabled, socket
redundancy is available. You can tick the Enhanced Redundancy only when the Mode is
set to None.
5. Open the Mode list and select Manual Revert.

Select the redundancy tab

Open the Mode list and select

Manual

In the Redundancy tab, the following takes place:

View the currently

activated source

Configure the
triggers

 Indication of the activated socket appears

 The Backup tab appears
 Triggers section appears
6. View the currently activate source.
7. In Failover Window of Source not Active, enter the required threshold time in seconds.
8. For each trigger, enable/disable it. See Table 3-18 on page 50. If trigger is enabled, set
the threshold time in seconds. See Table 3-21 on page 56.
9. Select the Backup tab and configure the backup sources.

a. Open the Num of Backups list and select the required number of backups. You can
select up to five backup sources. 
The Backup Sources section appears.

b. Backup Source lists are populated with all input TSs. Open the list for each backup
source and select the required source.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 51 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

10. Click Apply.

11. Following a redundancy switch, to revert back to primary, or any backup source, in the
Redundancy tab, open the Mode list and select Manual.
12. Open the Activate list and select Primary.

3.9.1.4 Configuring Redundancy - Automatic Revert Mode

Define for each trigger whether to activate it as triggers for the redundancy switch and the
threshold for the redundancy switch.
When selecting the Automatic Revert mode, you need also to configure stabilization time. The
stabilization time should be bigger than the configured failover time.
 To configure redundancy Automatic Revert mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. In the Input section, select the required socket and the Redundancy tab.
4. For input TS over GbE port, select Enhanced Redundancy. If not enabled, socket
redundancy is available. You can tick the Enhanced Redundancy only when the Mode is
set to None.
5. Ope n the Mode list and select Automatic Revert.

Select the redundancy tab

Open the Mode list and select

Automatic Revert

In the Redundancy tab, the following takes place:

View the currently

activated source
Configure the
triggers failover time

Configure the
triggers stabilization
time

 Indication of the activated socket appears

 The Backup tab appears
 Triggers section appears
6. View the currently activate source.
7. In Failover Window of Source not Active, enter the required threshold time in seconds.
8. For each trigger, enable/disable it. See Table 3-18 on page 50. If enabled, set the
threshold time in seconds. See Table 3-21 on page 56.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 52 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

9. For each trigger, if enabled, set the stabilization time as the following table lists:

Table 3-19: TS Protection - Stabilization Time

Trigger Parameter Name Explanation

Bitrate Underflow Bitrate Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 60

seconds.

Missing PAT PAT/PMT Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 10

seconds.
Missing PMT PAT/PMT Auto Revert

CC Err CC Error Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 600

seconds and default number of
errors is 4. For example, if during
600 seconds four counter errors
did occurred, automatic revert
takes place.

10. Select the Backup tab and configure the backup sources.

a. Open the Num of Backups list and select the required number of backups. You can
select up to five backup sources. 
The Backup Sources section appears.

b. Backup Source lists are populated with all input TSs. Open the list for each backup
source and select the required source.
11. Click Apply.

3.9.2 Input GbE Protection

The following section describes the redundancy mechanism for input GbE ports and sockets.
The input GbE protection is available in case Enhanced protection is not enabled.
Configuring socket redundancy includes the following stages:
 Configuring a primary and a backup socket.
Backup socket should have the same content as the primary socket. However, primary
and backup can have different Encapsulation mode, FEC and a set of SSM addresses.
You can define a backup socket on the same port as the primary or on a different port
but it should be on the same IOM module.
 Selecting the required redundancy mode. The following table lists the available modes:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 53 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

Table 3-20: GbE Input Redundancy modes

Parameter Explanation

None No redundancy is required

Manual The redundancy switch is performed manually

Automatic The redundancy switch is performed automatically

according to the predefined triggers.
The device automatically switches between
primary and backup according to their activation
status. Switching from the active one to the non
active occurs upon failure on the active one and
while the non active is in order.

Manual Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically

according to the predefined triggers. However,
switching back to the primary, when fixed, is
performed manually.

Automatic Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically

according to the predefined triggers. However,
the device automatically switches to the primary
when the primary is stabilized and even though
the backup is still in order. The baseline is that the
primary is preferred. For each trigger you can
define the stabilized time. See Configuring
Redundancy for GbE Input Socket - Automatic
Revert Mode on page 58.

 Defining redundancy triggers per socket

 In cas you select Automatic revert, configure stabilization time per redundancy trigger.

3.9.2.1 Configuring Redundancy for GbE Input Socket - Manual Mode

1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. In the Input section, select the required socket and the Redundancy tab.
4. Open the Mode list and select Manual.

Select the redundancy tab

Open the Mode list and select

Manual

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 54 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

In the Redundancy tab, the following takes place:

Mode is Manual View the currently Select the active

activated socket socket

 The activated option appears

 The Backup tab appears
5. View the current active socket.
6. In Active, select the required socket. In case the primary failed, open the Active list and
select Backup to perform a manual redundancy switch.
7. Select the Primary tab and configure the primary socket. See GbE TS Extraction on
page 39.
8. Select the Backup tab and configure the backup socket. See GbE TS Extraction on
page 39.

3.9.2.2 Configuring Redundancy for GbE Input Socket - Automatic Mode

When selecting the Automatic mode, configure the triggers for the redundancy switch.
By default, the alarm Socekt Not Active is always a trigger. You can view the elapsed time
between detecting a problem in the input port and raising the Socket Fail alarm. To configure
this threshold, see Table 3-10 on page 40.
For other triggers, define whether to activate them as triggers for the redundancy switch and
the threshold for the redundancy switch.
The Bitrate Underflow and the Scrambled A/V triggers raise an alarm only when they are
enabled triggers.
 To configure redundancy Automatic mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. In the Input section, select the required socket and the Redundancy tab.
4. Open the Mode list and select Automatic.

Select the redundancy tab

Open the Mode list and select

Manual

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 55 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

In the Redundancy tab, the following takes place:

View the currently

activated socket

Configure the
triggers

 Indication of the activated socket appears

 The Backup tab appears
 Triggers section appears
5. View the following:
 View the currently activated socket
 View the threshold for Socket Not Active
6. For each trigger, enable/disable it, if enabled, set the threshold time in seconds. The
following table lists the available triggers and provides important information per trigger:

Table 3-21: Triggers for Socket Redundancy

Trigger Explanation

Bitrate Underflow Default threshold is 5 seconds.

If for five seconds, the bitrate is lower than the minimum
expected bitrate, a redundancy switch will take place.

Missing PAT Default threshold is 2 seconds.

Missing PMT Default threshold is 2 seconds

PMT PID should be the same for primary and backup
sockets. This trigger requires also PAT missing as a trigger.

CC Err Default threshold is 60 seconds and default number of

errors is 4. For example, if during 60 seconds four counter
errors occurred, a redundancy switch takes place.

Scrambled A/V Based on Scrambling Counter Bits for the routed A/V PIDs
only.

PID Underflow You can configure each routed PID (ghost, EMM, ECM, ES,
PCR not on ES) to be monitored for this trigger.
Minimum bitrate - can be 0, which means PID missing, or
greater than 10k.
Note: All A/V PIDs under reference service are marked
automatically as a trigger with 0 bitrate threshold.
PID Underflow does not apply to the following:
 DPI PID - for future use
 Generated, re-generated tables and PID range

7. Select the Primary tab and configure the primary socket. See GbE TS Extraction on
page 39.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 56 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

8. Select the Backup tab and configure the backup socket. See GbE TS Extraction on
page 39.

3.9.2.3 Configuring Redundancy for GbE Input Socket - Manual Revert Mode
When selecting the Manual Revert mode, configure the triggers for the redundancy switch.
After a redundancy switch, if you wish to revert to the primary socket, change the mode to
Manual and revert, as explained below:
 To configure redundancy Automatic mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. In the Input section, select the required socket and the Redundancy tab.
4. Open the Mode list and select Manual Revert.

Select the redundancy tab

Open the Mode list and select

Manual

In the Redundancy tab, the following takes place:

View the currently

activated socket

Configure the
triggers

 Indication of the activated socket appears

 The Backup tab appears
 Triggers section appears
5. View the following:
 View the currently activated socket
 View the threshold for Socket Not Active
6. For each trigger, enable/disable it, if enabled, set the threshold time in seconds. See
Table 3-21 on page 56.
7. Select the Primary tab and configure the primary socket. See GbE TS Extraction on
page 39.
8. Select the Backup tab and configure the backup socket. See GbE TS Extraction on
page 39.
9. Following a redundancy switch, to revert back to primary, open the Mode list and select
Manual.
10. Open the Activate list and select Primary.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 57 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

3.9.2.4 Configuring Redundancy for GbE Input Socket - Automatic Revert Mode
Define for each trigger whether to activate it as triggers for the redundancy switch and the
threshold for the redundancy switch.
When selecting the Automatic Revert mode, you need also to configuring stabilization time.
The stabilization time should be bigger than the configured failover time.
 To configure redundancy Automatic Revert mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. In the Input section, select the required socket and the Redundancy tab.
4. Ope n the Mode list and select Automatic Revert.

Select the redundancy tab

Open the Mode list and select

Automatic Revert

In the Redundancy tab, the following takes place:

View the currently

activated socket
Configure the
triggers failover time

Configure the
triggers stabilization
time

 Indication of the activated socket appears

 The Backup tab appears
 Triggers section appears
5. View the following:
 View the currently activated socket
 View the threshold for Socket Not Active
6. For each trigger, enable/disable it, if enabled, set the threshold time in seconds. See
Table 3-21 on page 56.
7. For each trigger, if enabled, set the stabilization time as the following table lists:

Table 3-22: Stabilization Time

Trigger Parameter Name Explanation

Bitrate Underflow Bitrate Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 60

seconds.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 58 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning What’s Next...

Table 3-22: Stabilization Time

Trigger Parameter Name Explanation

Missing PAT PAT/PMT Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 10

seconds.
Missing PMT PAT/PMT Auto Revert

CC Err CC Error Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 600

seconds and default number of
errors is 4. For example, if during
600 seconds four counter errors
did occurred, automatic revert
takes place.

8. Select the Primary tab and configure the primary socket. See GbE TS Extraction on
page 39.
9. Select the Backup tab and configure the backup socket. See GbE TS Extraction on
page 39.

3.10 What’s Next...

Once you have completed the input configuration, move to Output Configuration on
page 60.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 59 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 4
Output Configuration

4.1 Configuring Output Ports and Provisioning the ProStream

The procedure of configuring the output ports and of provisioning the ProStream includes
several stages. The order in which you perform these stages varies according to the output
port. However, the essential stage is provisioning the device. The GUI, developed with this
procedure in mind, turns provisioning into an easy procedure.

4.2 Defining Broadcasting Networks

To organize the broadcasting devices, you can define networks and later on associate TSs to
the required networks. A network may include the following types of TSs:
Local TS - the TS is transmitted by the device you are currently configuring
External TS - the TS is transmitted by another device, yet it belongs to one of the networks of
your device. If a NIT table is generated for the network, the NIT also points to the external
TSs.
 To define networks
1. Open the web client of the device.
2. Select the Stream Config page.
3. In Output, select the Output Hierarchy node.
Output Hierarchy node is
selected

Main tab and configured

networks

Click to add a network

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 60 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Defining Broadcasting Networks

4. To add a network, click Add Network.

Enter the required

Network name

Enter the required

Network ID

Click to add a TS

5. In Network ID, enter the required Network ID. By default, a number in sequence with the
last defined network appears. You can enter the required network ID as long as this value
is not as another network ID.
6. In Network Name, enter the required name.

TIP: Local TSs are associated with the network when configuring the TSs.

7. To add external TSs, click Add TS.

NOTE: The local TSs are added while configuring the TS. See Provisioning the Output TS on page 66.

Enter TS required information

8. Enter the following information:

TS ID - enter the required TS ID
Original Network ID - enter the network ID of the originating delivery system.
Location - either of the following:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 61 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Defining Broadcasting Networks

 Local - the TS is transmitted by the device

 External - the TS is transmitted by another device
9. To add a network descriptor, click Add Descriptor.

Enter network descriptor required

information

Click to add network descriptor

10. Enter the following information:

Descriptor Type - enter the descriptor type as defined by the DVB standard.
Descriptor Value - enter the value according to the SDV standard.

TIP: If the TS is transmitted with a NIT, the NIT points to both local and external TSs and the table
includes all configured descriptors.

11. Click Done.

The Main tab is updated and displays the newly added network. It also includes the
associated TSs. Local TSs appear in green and external TSs in blue. Once you hover the
pointer over a TS, a tip appears with the TS information as the following pictures show:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 62 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Defining Broadcasting Networks

 To edit a network
1. Select Output Hierarchy > Main tab.
2. Do either of the following:
Select the record of the required network and click Edit Network,
Or
Double click the required network record.
The Network Parameters page appears and you can add a TS or a descriptor as explained
above.
 To delete a network
1. Select Output Hierarchy > Main tab.
2. Select the required network record.

TIP: To select multiple network-records, press <Ctrl> while selecting the required records.

3. Click Delete Network.

The network is removed from the table.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 63 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port Only

4.3 Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port Only

To output streams via a GbE output port, configure the sockets first. A socket is a terminal for
a TS. Each socket is defined by a unique combination of an IP address and UDP port.
You may add up to 128 sockets and add multiple sockets in one step. In addition, you may
delete sockets at any time.
 To configure a socket
1. In the Output section, select a GbE port.
The Output Properties section is updated as the following figure shows:

2. Click Sockets Configuration.

The Sockets Configuration page appears.

3. Do either of the following:

Edit the parameters of the enlisted sockets. For details, see Configuring the Output
Socket Parameters on page 64.
Add a socket or multiple sockets. For adding sockets, see Adding a Socket or Multiple
Sockets on page 35.
4. Click Done to save configuration and to close the web page dialog.
5. Click Apply to send the configuration to the device.
6. Continue by provisioning the TSs. See Provisioning the Output TS on page 66.

4.3.1 Configuring the Output Socket Parameters

In the Sockets Configuration page, do the following:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 64 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port Only

1. Select - check in case you wish to delete a socket. When clicking Delete Selected, the
selected socket is removed from the sockets list.
2. IP Address - type in the destination IP address according to the following table:

Table 4-1: Destination IP Address

Type Class Available Range

Unicast A 1.0.0.0 - 126.255.255.255

Unicast B 128.0.0.0 - 191.255.255.255

Unicast C 192.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.255

Multicast D 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255

NOTE: The following reserved ranges should not be used: 

reserved: 224.0.0.0 - 224.0.0.255,
reserved for administration: 239.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255

3. UDP Port - type in UDP port. The available range is 1- 65535.

TIP: You can sort IP/UDP columns by double clicking the columns headings.

4. Shaping Mode - select either of the following to control the traffic

Best Effort - the best bitrate you can allocate to the socket based on the input bitrate
Null Padding - null PIDs are added to maintain the bitrate. See also Provisioning the
Output TS on page 66.
5. Bitrate - enter the required bit rate for the TS
6. Ecnap. Mode - open the Encapsulation Mode and select one of the following:
UDP - according to the transmitter/receiver
RTP - according to the transmitter/receiver. If FEC is used, select RTP
HRTP - N/A for a standalone version
TCP - Input only. It applies to data with low rate that is transmitted over TCP
7. FEC - FEC requires extra data for detecting and correcting the errors. The extra data is
sent on a separate socket(s) and includes the number of rows and columns to be
calculated. Higher number of rows and columns, yields a higher overhead and a better
error correction ability. Define the FEC parameters as follows:

Parameter Explanation

No FEC No Forward Error Correction is applied

Pro-MPEG Annex B/SMPE 2022 Annex C FEC standard. Select to apply FEC.

Num of Col enter the number of columns to be

calculated

Num of Row enter the number of rows to be calculated

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 65 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Parameter Explanation

2D FEC select to enable the 2 dimensional Forward

Error Correction option, that is the
calculation includes columns only.

8. Static Mode - select to enable static mode and to allow editing the Destination Static MAC.
9. Destination Static MAC - when Static Mode is enabled, enter the Static MAC of the
destination port of the TS.
10. IP Packet Size - select the required IP packet. See To provision the output TS over GbE
port or ASI port on page 66.

4.4 Provisioning the Output TS

When provisioning the output TS, you may do the following:
 Associate the TS with a network ID
 Determine which tables to create in the TS level. Available tables vary according to the
port type that outputs the TS.
 Set time zones (advanced configuration), if broadcasting time offset information (TOT) is
important.
 Define whether to scramble with a fixed key
 Define whether to mirror the TS

NOTE: The following instructions refer to TSs to be output over a GbE port or ASI port, unless else in
indicated.

 To provision the output TS over GbE port or ASI port

1. In the Output section, select a TS.
The page is updated with relevant tabs.
2. For GbE port - In the Main tab, define the following parameters of the output TS:

TS over GbE
output port

 To enable the output TS, click Enable.

 Under Destination, in IP, enter the destination IP of the output TS and in UDP, enter the
destination UDP port.
 Under Source, to overwrite the source IP address, enter in IP the required IP address
and in UDP the required UDP port.
 In TS ID, enter the required ID number.
 In Bitrate (bps), enter the required bit rate.
 To apply null padding, select Null Padding.
 To add a name to the TS, enter a name in the TS Name box. You can enter up to 40

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 66 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

characters. Once you click any where in the Main tab, the name appears in the tree
view as follows: TS <TS name>-<TS ID>.

Enter TS name

TS name in tree view

 Open the Encapsulation Mode list and select either UDP or RTP encapsulation mode.
3. Open the IP Packet Size and select the IP packet size ranging from 188 - 1316 bytes. The
packet size is derived from the number of MPEG packets that are packed in a single IP
packet, as indicated in the following table:

Table 4-2: IP Packet Size

IP Packet Size MPEG Packet

1316 7

1128 6

940 5

752 4

564 3

376 2

188 1

NOTE: The larger the IP packet size is, the more MPEG packets it carries and the overhead is smaller.

 Under Network, open the Network ID list and select the network ID. The list is
populated with the networks IDs defined during Network configuration. See Defining
Broadcasting Networks on page 60.
 In Original Network ID, enter the original network ID according to the SDV standard.
For ASI - In the Main tab, define the following parameters of the output TS:

TS over ASI
output port

 In TS ID, enter the required ID number.

 Under Network, open the Network ID list and select the network ID. The list is
populated with the networks IDs defined during Network configuration. See Defining
Broadcasting Networks on page 60.
 In Original Network enter the required network ID as defined by the SDV standard.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 67 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

NOTE: The Network configuration is automatically reflected in Output Hierarchy > Main tab.

 In TS Name, enter a name for the TS. You can enter up to 40 characters. Once you
click anywhere in the Main tab, the name appears in the tree view. It appears as
follows: TS <TS name>-<TS ID>
Entered TS name

TS name in the tree view

4. In Tables tab, check the following required boxes:

Option Explanation

PAT Creates a Program Associated Table that contains the PMT PIDs of
all services included in the TS.
In PAT Spooling Frequency (PAT/Sec), enter the required spooling per
one second.

TDT ProStream creates a Time Date Table.

CAT ProStream creates a Conditional Access Table. This table contains

information that is used by an access device (such as a set top box
with a smart card) to decode programs that are part of a Conditional
Access System. See also Allocating EMM PIDs on page 172

TOT ProStream creates a Time Offset Table. Click the Create TOT link to
configure the TOT time zones. See, step To configure Time Zones,
especially if the broadcast includes time offset information (Create
TOT is selected), click the Time Zone tab. on page 69.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 68 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Option Explanation

SDT Prostream creates a Service Description Table (SDT). This table

contains data describing the services, e.g., the names of services,
the service provider, etc.
Select either of the following:
 Actual - when selected, SDT relates to all services of the TS.
Once Actual is selected, you can select also Other.
 Other - when selected, SDT relates to all services of TSs that
belong to the same network, that is that have the same network
ID.
Note: Define all required SDT parameters. Other wise, SDT table
includes the default values. See Defining General Service
Parameters on page 79.

NIT In NIT (Network Information Table), select one of the following:

 None - NIT is not transmitted with the TS
 Actual Only - NIT relates to the network of the selected TS only
 Actual and Other - both NIT actual and Other tables are
generated. NIT Other table relates to TSs with network IDs that
are different than the selected TS
 Ref in PAT Only - Adds to the PAT a pointer that the TS carries a
NIT.

Regeneration Applies to GbE ports only. Select one of the following:

Mode  None - don’t regenerate any tables
 DVB - regenerate DVB related tables only
 PSIP - regenerate PSIP tables only, such as STT, VCT and EIT. See
Regenerating PSIP Tables on page 75.

5. To configure Time Zones, especially if the broadcast includes time offset information
(Create TOT is selected), click the Time Zone tab.

6. To configure the Time Zone, click Add Time Zone.

7. Define the following fields of the table:
Country Code - type in the country code.
Country Region ID - type in the ID of the region.
Local Time Offset - select the local time offset according to GMT.
Time of Change - type in the Day Light Saving date according to the required format: dd/
mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.
Next Time Offset - select the local time according to GMT in which Day Light Saving is
expected to change.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 69 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Select - select this box if you wish to cancel this row. Once you click Delete selected, the
selected row is removed from the table.
8. To configure scrambling options, select Scrambling tab.

Descrambler

Scrambler

9. Open the list and select the required option:

 No Scrambling - no scrambling is required and the TS is output as a clear transport.
Select this option in Fixed Key application on the Descrambler.
 Fixed Key - select to allow scrambling each socket with a different key. It prevents
mass de-scrambling by unauthorized viewers in the very rare cases that the keys are
unveiled. Select this option in Fixed Key application on the Scrambler.
10. To define advanced configuration, select the Advanced tab.

TS over GbE port

TS over ASI port

11. To define advanced GbE output TS parameters, define the following:

Parameter Explanation

FEC Select either of the following:

no FEC
Pro-MPEG Annex B/SMPTE 2022 Annex C - FEC standard to
output with FEC. See Configuring the Output Socket Parameters
on page 64.

FEC Col Num Define the number of column

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 70 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Parameter Explanation

FEC Row Num Define the number of rows

2D FEC Select to allow two-dimensional FEC

Mirror of Select the output socket to be duplicated to a mirror port for

monitoring.

Mirror Force Clear Select to mirror the socket as a clear stream

Static MAC Select to enable static MAC

TTL Time To Leave. A limit on the period of time or number of

iterations or transmissions that a packet can experience before it
should be discarded.

DSCP Differentiated Services Codepoint. Enter 0 or 1 to define the way

an IP packet is queued while waiting to be forwarded within a
router.

Stream Descriptor You can remove input descriptors in TS level, resulting in

TAG Filters removing the indicated input descriptors from all services of the
output TS. To filter the input descriptors, enter in the Stream
Descriptors TAG Filters box the descriptor TAGs you wish to remove
from the output TS.

TAGs to filter

See also, PID Advanced Options on page 94.

12. To define advanced ASI output TS, set the following:

Mirror Of - select the TS to be duplicated to a mirror TS for monitoring. See TS Mirroring
on page 77.
Mirror Force Clear - Select to mirror the socket as a clear stream
Encryption TAN - Applies to Sky Italia only. Open the list and select one of the following
encryption methods: None (default NDS encryption algorithm), 1,2, or 3.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 71 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Stream Descriptor TAG Filters - You can remove input descriptors in TS level, resulting in
removing the indicated input descriptors from all services of the output TS. To filter the
input descriptors, enter in the Stream Descriptors TAG Filters box the descriptor TAGs you
wish to remove from the output TS:

TAGs to be removed
from the output

See also, PID Advanced Options on page 94.

13. Click Done to close the window and to save the configuration.
14. Select the Delivery Info tab.

15. By default Delivery Type is None. Select the required delivery type:
 Cable
 Satellite
 Terrestrial
The Delivery Info tab is updated accordingly.

4.4.1 Configuring Delivery Information

4.4.1.1 Configuring Cable Delivery Type

Configure the following parameters as defined by the DVB standard. For explanation, see
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Specification for Service Information (SI) in DVB systems,
section Delivery system descriptors.
Frequency (100Hz,Hex)
FEC Inner
FEC Outer
Modulation
Symbol Rate (100Hz, Hex) - the symbol rate

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 72 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

4.4.1.2 Configuring Satellite Delivery Type

Configure the following parameters as defined by the DVB standard. For explanation, see
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Specification for Service Information (SI) in DVB systems,
section Delivery system descriptors.
 Tuning Frequency (100Hz,Hex)
 Orbital Position
 Polarization
 FEC Inner
 Modulation
 Symbol Rate (100Hz, Hex) - the symbol rate

4.4.1.3 Configuring Terrestrial Delivery Type

Configure the following parameters as defined by the DVB standard. For explanation, see
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Specification for Service Information (SI) in DVB systems,
section Delivery system descriptors.

Center Frequency (10Hz,Dec) Bandwidth

Constellation Hierarchy

Code Rate HP Code Rate LP

Guard Interval Transmission Mode

Other Frequency Priority

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 73 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

4.4.2 Regenerating DVB

ProStream 9000 may regenerate the Event Information Table (EIT) at the output. To
regenerate, ProStream 9000 parses the EIT at the input and draws the relevant events
according to the services included in the output TS.

Table 4-3: EIT Regeneration Specification

Specification Explanation

EIT PID 0x12

Table ID 0x4E - for current/next events

0x50 - 0x5F - for scheduled events

Parsing Up to 500 services

Average of 165 events per service

Output Up to 128 services

ProStream ProStream 4.10 and up

4.4.2.1 Configuring EIT Regeneration

NOTE: Configuration applies to the output only.

1. Open the web client of the device.

2. Select the Stream Config tab.
3. Select the required TS.
4. Select the Tables tab.

In Regeneration Mode, select

DVB

5. In Regeneration Mode, select DVB.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 74 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

6. In Output, browse to the required service and select it.

7. Select the DVB tab. The DVB tab appears only once you select an output TS > Tables and
define DVB as the Regeneration Mode.

8. Select Regen Tables.

9. To define the input to be parsed for EIT regeneration, do the following:
 Open the Input TS list and select the TS that includes the input service.
 In Input Service, enter the input service.
10. Click Apply.
11. Select the Events tab to view the event details.

Select the service

Select the Events tab

Scheduled events

4.4.3 Regenerating PSIP Tables

The Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) standard, is an extension of the MPEG2
encoding standards. PSIP is a collection of tables designed to operate within every transport
stream for terrestrial broadcast of digital television. The purpose of PSIP is to describe
information at system and event levels for all services carried in a particular TS. Additionally,
information for analog channels as well as digital channels from other TSs may be
incorporated.
PSIP includes the following tables:
 STT (System Time Table) - provides time reference
 MGT (Master Guide Table) - lists the PIDs of each of the tables
 VCT - lists all virtual channels included in the TS. VCT may refer to either of the following:
 TVCT (Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table)
 CVCT (Cable Virtual Channel Table)
 EIT (Event Information Table) - provides information about events planned on the virtual
channels
 ETT (Extended Text Table) Optional - detailed information about the planned events
Regenerating includes the following stages:
 PSIP extraction in the input
 Configuring the output TS and PSIP regeneration

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 75 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

 Associating required services to the regenerated PSIP tables

 To extract PSIP tables
1. In the Input section, select the required socket.
2. For TS input over a GbE port, select the General tab.
For TS input over an ASI port, select the Main tab.

TS input over an ASI port TS input over a GbE port

3. Open the Extraction list and select PSIP.

4. Click Apply.
 To regenerate PSIP tables at the output
1. In the Output section, select the required output TS.
2. Select the Tables tab.

3. In PSIP/DVB, open the Regeneration Mode list and select PSIP.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 76 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Additional options appear:

4. In ETT PID - enter the required PID for ETT.

5. In EIT PID- enter the required PID for EIT.
6. In VCT Type - select either CVCT or TCVT.
7. In GPS UTC Offset enter the required offset to synchronize between GPS and UTC time.
The default offset time due to SDT is 15 seconds.
8. Click Apply.
 To associate service(s) with the PSIP tables
1. In the Output section, select the required output service.
2. Select the PISIP tab. The PSIP tab appears only once you select an output TS > Tables and
define PSIP as the Regeneration Mode.
3. In PSIP tab, select Regenerate Tables.

4. In Input TS, select the input TS that inputs the PSIP tables.
5. In Input Service, enter the ID of the input service.
6. If the broadcast provider has changed the channel number, focus on the VCT section.
7. To allow overriding of the input channel number, select Enable Override and enter the
required major and minor channel numbers.
8. Click Apply.

4.4.4 TS Mirroring
This feature allows to duplicate an output TS for monitoring purposes. The device duplicates
and output TS from any interface (IP, ASI) to any other TS over any interface. This feature
supports all the functionality of the mirrored TS such as rate shaping, scrambling, RSS, tables
generation, common PCR, PID range or DToIP. You can configure the mirrored TS to be
always clear.
To allow mirroring, verify that the mirroring TS is clear of any configuration and provisioning.
1. In Output, select the required TS.
2. Check all the tabs to verify the following:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 77 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

 No configuration is defined. For example, in Tables, no table is selected to be

generated.
 No content is provisioned to the mirroring TS.
3. Select the Advanced tab.

TS over a GbE port

TS over a ASI port

4. Open the Mirror Of list and select the required TS. The Mirror Of list is populated with the
provisioned output TSs.
5. To have a clear TS at all times, select Mirror Force Clear.
6. Click Apply.

4.5 Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

When provisioning/multiplexing, you route a specific input (service/PID) to a specific output
(service/PID). You may use the Input section (when you read input information from the input
ports) and move services or PIDs from Input section to the Output section and then provision
them. On the other hand, you may use the New Service, New PID, PID Range buttons, enter
service/PID parameters and provision them. To provision a Reference Service, see Reference
Service on page 89.
An input service is provisioned to an output transport stream only. An input PID is provisioned
to an output service or transferred as an independent PID (ghost PID).
 To provision using the Input section
1. In the Input section, select an input component from a service level and below.
The Input Properties section displays important information about the selected
component.
2. In the Output section, select an appropriate output component.
3. Click Add to Output.
The Output section is immediately updated and you may define the output properties of
the service or PID.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 78 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

NOTE: The ECM PID icon displayed in the input section under the service, indicates a CA descriptor only.
An ECM PID is displayed in the input section as a ghost PID. To pass the ECM PID to the output, select it
and transfer it to the output section using the multiplexing buttons.

 To delete an output component

1. In the Output section, select a component.
2. Click Remove from Output.
The Output section is immediately updated.

4.5.1 Provisioning/Multiplexing a Service

When provisioning a service, you may change its service ID, name, PMT PID and PCR PID. In
addition, you may add to a service a Reference Service as explained Reference Service on
page 89.
 To provision a service
1. Do either of the following procedures:
a. In the Input section, select a service.
a. In the Output section, select a TS.
a. Click Add to Output. The service with its current configuration appears in the Output
section and you may define its output properties.
Or
b. In the Output section, select an output component from a TS level and below. If you
select a PID, a new service is added to the parent TS.
a. Click New Service. The Output Section is immediately updated. You may define the
service input and output parameters as the following section explains.

4.5.1.1 Defining General Service Parameters

1. In the Output section, select a service.
The Stream Config page is immediately updated:

The above figure refers to New service versus New Reference Service. For further
information, refer to Reference Service on page 89.
2. Type in the required information in the following fields:
Name - type in the service name, for example CNN, NBA.
Service ID - service identification number at output port.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 79 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

PMT PID - the PID over which the service’s PMT (Program Map Table) is transmitted.
PCR PID - relevant to New Service only. The PID over which the service’s PCR (Program
Clock Reference) is transmitted.
Priority - In Priority, define the priority for dropping services in case of overflow. Services
defined as Low are the first ones to be dropped and services with High priority are the
last ones to be dropped. The available priorities are as follows: High, Normal, Medium,
Low.
ACE Transcoding - select to allocate a transcoding engine for this service. If all
transcoding engines are occupied, an alarm is raised when sending to device, clicking
Apply. To optimize the transcoding performance, click the Alloc Transcoding button.
CA Desc Location - Select one of the following:
 Service
 PID
 Both
3. In Service Description section, define the following SDT related parameters:

NOTE: Configure the Service Description parameters, only in case SDT table is selected in output TS >
Tables tab. See Provisioning the Output TS on page 66.

EIT Scheduled - when selected, indicates that EIT schedule information for the service is
present in the current TS.
EIT Present Following - when selected, indicates that EIT schedule information/following
for the service is present in the current TS.
Free CA Mode - when selected, indicates that at least one component of the service is
scrambled.
Service Type - indicates the type of the service as defined in the DVB standard. It allows
the service provider to describe the nature of the service, such as, broadcast television,
on-demand television, broadcast radio, data broadcast etc’.
Running Status - indicates the status of the service:
 undefined
 not running
 starts in a few seconds
 pausing
 running
Provider Name - enter the name of the service provider as defined by the DVB standard.
SDT Descriptors - click to add an SDT descriptor as defined by the standard.

4.5.1.2 Defining Slate (Static Apology Message) Parameters

When a broadcast of TV service is disrupted, the Slate feature allow MSOs quick way to
quickly inform their subscribers of their efforts to restore the service. The Slate feature allows
to configure for any service an alternative or backup input feed or source that is enabled on
the output upon disruption of the primary feed.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 80 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

The following table lists the Slate specifications:

Table 4-4: Slate Specifications

Specification Explanation

Total number of Slate feeds Up to five per device

Video format of Slate feed Any of the following presented in MPEG transport
packets:
 SD MPEG2
 SD AVC
 HD MPEG2
 HD AVC
 AC3 2.0
 AAC 2.0 ¡K
Note: Format of slate feed should match primary feed

Bitrate of Slate feed CBR only

Note: The bit rate of the alternative feed is not greater
than the bit rate of the primary feed(s)

Interface Any input to any output

Slate activation modes The following modes are supported:

Manual - you initiate the switch from the primary feed to
the slate feed
Automatic - device initiates the switch based on
predefined triggers

Slate Triggers See Slate Mode on page 82.

 To configure Slate feed

1. In the Output section, select a service.
The Stream Config page is immediately updated
2. Select the Slate tab.:

3. To enable slate, tick Enable Slate.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 81 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

4. Open the Slate Mode list and select one of the following:

Table 4-5: Slate Mode

Option Explanation

Auto The Slate switch is performed automatically according to pre-defined

triggers:
 Lost of the Video PID - the Video PID drops to Zero bit-rate
 Lost of input on the Encoders - Harmonic encoders only. The
encoder stops streaming video traffic upon loss of input signal
(configurable for every video PID). ProStream9000 detects a zero
bit-rate at the input video.
When switching to the alternative feed, ProStream remaps the
components of the alternative feeds PIDs (Video, Audio) to the main
channel component PIDs to ensure signal continuity on the output.

Manual The user initiates the Slate switch

Manual Revert The user initiates the revert

5. Open the Slate TS list and select the input TS that includes the slate.
6. In Service ID enter the Slate service ID.

4.5.1.3 Setting PCR PID

A service may carry a PCR PID. A PCR PID can outflow according to one of the following
options:
 Carried over one of the service’s PIDs
 Carried over a reference service - only in case a reference service is configured
 Carried over any of the incoming PIDs
 A generated PID - PCR PID generated by the device and no input indication is required.
 No ES - the PCR PID is out flowing as an independent PID
 To set a PCR PID
1. In the Output section, select a service.
The Stream Config page is immediately updated
2. Select the PCR tab.

3. Verify that Generation Mode is not selected. To generate a PCR PID, see Generate PCR on
page 84.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 82 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

4. Open the Set PCR On list and select one of the following:

Option Explanation

Service PIDs Select one of the service PIDs.

The Set PCR On list is automatically populated with the PIDs
of the service.

Reference Service Only in case a reference service is configured

New PID  If Generation Mode is selected - the PCR PID is

generated by the device and no input is required. See
 If Generation Mode is not selected - an input is required
and the PCR PID is out flowing as an independent PID.

No PCR Select to indicate that the service is outputted without PCR

PID

5. Select the required instruction:

 If the PCR is carried over the video/audio PIDs of the service, do the following:

a. Verify that Generation Mode is not selected.

b. Open the Set PCR On list and select the required PID of the service.
 If the PCR is carried over the reference service, do the following:

a. Verify that Generation Mode is not selected.

b. Open the Set PCR On list and select the reference service.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 83 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

 If the PCR should out flow independently, do the following:

a. Verify that Generation Mode is not selected.

b. Open the Set PCR On list and select New PID....
c. In PCR PID, enter the ID of the PCR PID to outflow the PCR PID.
d. In Input TS, select the input TS that inputs the required PCR PID.
e. In Input PID, enter the required Input PID.

4.5.1.4 Generate PCR

ProStream 9000 may generate a PCR PID at the output regardless of the input PCR. As a
result, each output service can have its own PCR PID with a new time baseline.

NOTE: When transcoding is required, the PCR should outflow over the video PID.

You can configure a PCR PID as follows:

 Each service generates its own PCR PID
 Common PCR - a single PCR PID is common to a few services
In both options, the PCR PID is output as a separate PID or over one of the ESs of the service.
Usually the PCR PID is out-streamed over the video PID.
 To generate PCR
NOTE: This section does not apply to transcoded services. See

1. Select the required service and click PCR tab.

2. Select the Generation Mode box.
Select Generation
Mode

3. In Set PCR On, select one of the following:

 Select one of the PIDs of the service
 Select New PID. The PCR PID box appears.
4. In PCR PID, enter the required ID for the PCR PID.

NOTE: Continue with step 5, only to configure Common PCR.

5. For Common PCR, do the following:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 84 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

a. In PCR PID enter the required PID.

6. Select each of the required services and for the PID of the service to carry the PCR, do
the following:
 Select the PID.
 Select the Insert PCR box.

Select Insert PCR

NOTE: The Insert PCR box is enabled when a service is selected and in PCR tab you select Generation
mode.

 Select the Advanced tab and in Ref PCR PID, enter the input PCR PID. The input PCR
PID is a baseline for the generation of the PCR at the output.

Define the Ref PCR PID

4.5.1.5 Transcoding
To transcode the service, see Transcoding an HD/SD Service on page 102.
To re-encode the service, see Re-Encoding on page 208.

4.5.1.6 Setting the PMT Generation Mode

1. Select the PMT tab.

2. Open the PMT Generation Mode list and select one of the following options:
 Create - the default option. The ProStream creates a new PMT for the service.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 85 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

 Pass - the ProStream transfers the Input PMT to an output stream without changing or
manipulating it. The PAT includes a reference to this PMT.
 None - the components of the service are streamed without any PMT.
 NMX - NMX sends the PMT to ProStream 9000
 Regenerate - the ProStream regenerates PMT
3. Dynamic Service - Specifies the device response when the input service is missing from
the input PAT. Enable this check box if you know the input for this service may be
dynamic, and you want the device to respond as follows if the service does not appear in
the input stream:
 The device does not raise any alarm regarding this service
 The service is removed from the PAT
 The device does not stream out the PMT of this service
Once you define a service as a dynamic service by selecting Dynamic Service, proceed and
configure the input TS and input service ID as the following picture shows:

Select Input TS Enter input service ID

a. Open the Input TS list and select the required input TS. The list is populated with the
incoming TSs.
b. In Input Service, enter the ID of the input service.
4. In PMT Spooling Frequency (PMT/Sec), enter the required spooling per one second.

4.5.1.7 Adding a Descriptor

You can add a descriptor to the PMT.
1. Select the required service.
2. Select the PMT tab.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 86 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

3. Click Add Descriptor. The following dialog opens:

4. Open the Descriptor Tag list and select the required descriptor. The list of descriptors is
comprised of the following sections:

Table 4-6: Descriptors in Descriptor Tag List

Sections of List Explanation

Pre-defined descriptors This section is marked by a blue line. It Includes the

following four descriptors that appear above the blue
line:
 Registration descriptor
 Language descriptor
 Platform descriptor
 Integrated signaling descriptor

Descriptors This section includes descriptors that you need to define

by entering the descriptor details in hexadecimal. See
Standard ES Types and Descriptors on page 133.

Other This section allows to add and define required

descriptors that are not included in the list. Enter the
descriptor details (descriptor type and value) according to
the standard.

4.5.1.8 Defining Service Redundancy

The program redundancy switch has a unique triggering mechanism. The redundancy switch
is triggered by a program underflow and not by an alarm as other redundancy methods. The
related alarms only indicate that a redundancy switch has taken place.
The user can configure the triggering condition by defining when to activate the redundancy
switch:
 Program underflow
 Program PID underflow
 To define redundancy parameters
1. Select the Redundancy tab.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 87 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

2. To set the redundancy mode, open the Redundancy Mode list and select on of the following
options:
 None - program redundancy is inactivated
 Manual - the user initiates the program redundancy switch
 Automatic - the program redundancy switch is performed automatically according to
the predefined triggers. See following step.
 Manual Revert - the program redundancy switch is performed automatically
according to the predefined triggers. However, switching back to the primary
program, when fixed, is performed manually. See Reverting Manually on page 88.
3. To define the number of backups, open the Num of Backups list and select the required
number, a number between 0-3.
4. Applies to Automatic mode only. To define a redundancy trigger, open the Failover
Condition list and select either of the following:

 Any PID - the redundancy switch takes place upon under flow of any of the service
PIDs
 All PIDs - the redundancy switch takes place upon under flow of all of the service
PIDs, or in case a video PID or PCR PID is missing.

NOTE: When selecting a PID of the service, you can configure in Properties the backup PID.

4.5.1.9 Reverting Manually

1. Select the Redundancy tab.
2. Open the Redundancy Mode list and select Manual.
The Active Source box appears.
3. Open the Active Source list and select Primary.
4. Click Done and Apply.

4.5.1.10 Setting EAS Parameters

To enable the EAS service to outflow, do the following:
 Enable EAS for the output service
 Select the EAS service to outflow instead of the provisioned output service
1. To select the output service, in Output, select the required service.
2. Select the EAS tab.

3. To enable the EAS for the service, select Enable EAS.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 88 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

4. To select the EAS service (channel) for this output service, open the list and select the
required channel.
Once this EAS is required, the EAS is streamed out instead of the provisioned output
service. See also Configuring EAS Parameters on page 213.

4.5.2 Configuring BISS

See BISS Overview on page 178.

4.5.3 Reference Service

The Reference Service feature allows an output service to automatically update according to
changes detected on a specific input service. The input service is called “Reference Service”.
The Reference Service option allows ProStream to support two main applications:
 MHP - (Multi media Home Platform). This standard allows streaming data for interactive
TV application.
 ASM (Automatic Service Mode) - You may choose to pass a service from the input to the
output without specifying the exact PIDs of this service.
You can add a new reference service only to a service. The service becomes a parent service
as the following picture shows:

A Reference Service

ProStream dynamically aggregates the PIDs and descriptors of multimedia (audio/video)

services with the data PIDs and descriptors of one or more MHP Services which are received
from an MHP server that plays them out.
Any changes in the MHP services do not affect the stable streaming of the content of the
parent service.
A service that includes reference services may also include explicitly defined ESs, just like any
regular service. The PCR of such a service may be carried on an explicitly-defined ES, or on
an ES that is part of the reference service. In the latter case, the reference service that
includes the PCR stream is marked as Carry PCR. See also Setting PCR PID on page 82.
 To provision a New Reference Service
1. In the Output section, select a service to include a reference service.
2. Click New Ref. Service.
A reference service is added to the parent service.
3. Select the Reference Service.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 89 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

The Output Properties section is updated accordingly:

4. Open the Input list and select the required input port. This is the port through which the
reference service is streamed into the device.
5. In the Service ID box, type the ID of the required input service. This is the ID of the
reference service.
6. In PID Priority, define the priority for dropping PIDs in case of overflow. PIDs defined as
Low are the first ones to be dropped and PIDs with High priority are the last ones to be
dropped. The available priorities are as follows:
 As Parent
 High
 Normal
 Medium
 Low
7. By default, Remap PIDs is disabled. To enable it, select Remap PIDs. It allows to remap the
PIDs of the reference service and to set the PID range. To set PID range, do the following:
Select Remap PID and in Range Start and Range End, enter the first and last PID of the PIDs
range, respectively.
Remap PIDs
option is
enabled and
Range Start and
Range End
boxes appear

To maintain the PIDs as in the input, disable the Remap PID option. Range Start and Range
End boxes are removed as the following picture shows:

Remap PIDs of
Reference
Service is
disabled

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 90 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

8. PID Filtering applies to EDU only and currently not supported. When the device functions
as an EDU, in PID Filtering enter the component descriptor that should be ignored. You
can indicate up to five components to be ignored.

For EDU only. Set PIF

filtering

 To Provision a Reference Service from the Input

1. In the Output section, select a service to include a reference service.
2. In the Input section, select a service to be provisioned as a reference service.
3. Click Add to Output.
The input service appears as a reference service of the selected output service.

Select an input service The input service is transferred Reference service

as a reference service properties are as the
selected input service

4.6 Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

This section instructs you on how to provision PIDs. You can add a single PID or a rage of
PIDs.
 To provision PIDs
Do either of the following procedures:
1. In Input, select the PID you wish to move.
2. In Output, select a service or a PID in a service, or in case of a ghost PID, select a TS.
3. Click Add to Output.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 91 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

The Output section is immediately updated. You may continue by defining the PID output
parameters.
Or
1. In Output, select a service or a PID in a service, or in case of a ghost PID, select a TS.
2. Click New PID.
A new PID appears in the Output section with a default value. Continue by defining its
input and output parameters.

 To provision a range of PIDs

1. In Input, select the required incoming TS and in Output select the required output TS.
2. Click PID Range.
3. In the message that appears, click OK.
A new PID range appears in the Output section with a default value:0x0 - 0x1FFF.

PID range with default values

This value indicates a range that includes all the PIDs of the input TS. If you intend to
provision all of the PIDs, verify that under TS > Tables, none of the tables are selected to
prevent table override. However, you can configure the required PID range as instructed
below.
4. Select the PID Range.
The properties of the PID range appear and you may configure them as follows:

5. In Input, select the required Input port and socket.

6. To define the PID range, enter in Start PID and in End PID the first PID of the range and the
last PID, respectively.
7. To remap, enter in Start Remap PID the first PID. The last remap PID is automatically
calculated once you click out of the Start Remap PID box.

4.6.1 Defining PID Parameters

1. Select the required output PID.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 92 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

The Re Muxing tab is updated and shows the Input/default values of the PID as the
following figure shows:

2. In Remux Mode, select one of the following options:

 PID - allows to multiplex a PID that is identified according to the input TS, service and
PID. (see picture above)
 Component - allows to multiplex a PID that is identified according to the input TS,
service and component. That is, one of the component descriptors has the indicated
component ID.

 ES Type - allows to multiplex a PID that is identified according to the input TS, service
and ES type. If the ES is an audio PID, you may select the required language.

3. In Input, select the required components as follows:

 TS - open the TS list and select the required TS.
 Service ID - enter the required input service ID

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 93 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

 Fields according to Remux mode:

Table 4-7: Remux Mode Parameters

Remux Mode Configuration

PID In PID, enter the required input PID

Component Component ID, enter the required component ID

ES Type In ES Type, enter the required ES type. If it is an audio PID, select in

Language the required language.

4. In the Output section, enter the following:

 PID - enter the ID of the output PID
 ES Type - enter the ES type of the output PID
 Insert PCR - select to indicate whether the PID carries the PCR PID. This box status
appears in one of the following options:

Under service, Generation Mode is enabled and you can

configure the PID to carry the PCR.

PCR configuration follows the input

PCR configuration is disabled for this PID

5. For a video PID in a transcoded service, select the Transcoding tab. See Video
Transcoding on page 99.
6. For advanced configuration, click Advanced Configuration.
7. For adding a descriptor, select Descriptor tab.

4.6.1.1 PID Advanced Options

1. Select the required output PID.
2. Select the Advanced tab.

3. Ref PCR PID - indicates the PCR PID as defined in Setting PCR PID on page 82.
4. PID Priority - define the priority for dropping PIDs in case of overflow. PIDs defined as
Low are the first ones to be dropped and PIDs with High priority are the last ones to be
dropped. The available priorities are as follows:
 As Parent - either TS or service, according to the parent stream.
 High
 Normal

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 94 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

 Medium
 Low
5. CC Restamping - select the CC Restamping box to enable this option.
6. PID Presence Detection - when selected, the alarm PID Missing is raised. By default this
box is checked.
7. In Tracking Input Descriptors section, do the following:
 Enable Tracking - select to track changes in input of the descriptor and to allow
moving the descriptor from input to output. Once you select this option, you can
select PIDs to be filtered.
 Input Service ID - enter the input service ID that carries the PID you wish to enable
tracking and/or filter its descriptors.
 Filter CA Descriptor - select to remove the input CA descriptor from the output PID of
the service.
 Filter Stream ID Descriptor - select to remove the input Stream ID descriptor from the
output PID of the service.
To filter descriptors in TS level, see page 70.
8. Bitrate Underflow Trigger for Redundancy - by default this option is checked.
9. In Min. Bitrate, enter the minimum bitrate in bps. If the output bitrate is lower than the
indicated minimum bitrate, a redundancy switch may take place. See Table 3-21 on
page 56.
10. Scrambling - open the list and select one of the following options:
 Per Service/Transport No Override - follows the scrambling configuration of the TS or
service
 Always Scramble - even if TS or service are not scrambled, the PID is scrambled as
long as a fixed key or a CW is provided. For future use only.
 Always Clear- even if TS or service are scrambled, the PID is always clear.

4.6.1.2 Configuring PID Descriptors

1. Select the required output PID.
2. Select the Descriptors tab.

3. To add a descriptor to the original PID, click Add Descriptor.

4. For further instructions, see Adding a Descriptor on page 86.

NOTE: The configured CA descriptors is automatically added when creating an ECM PID.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 95 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration What’s Next...

4.6.1.3 Adding Ghost PIDs to the TS

Ghost PIDs are independent Elementary Streams (ES) that are not associated with any
service. The ghost PID configuration allows you to transfer and remap PIDs as well as
relocate their destination. You may also remap Ghost PIDs to new PIDs as long as they do not
conflict with previously configured components.
 To add ghost PIDs to the TS
1. Select an Output TS.
2. Select an Input PID or create a new PID by clicking New PID.
3. If you select an Input PID, click Add to Output.
4. Configure the PID in the Output section. For further information, refer to Provisioning/
Multiplexing PIDs on page 91.

4.7 What’s Next...

Once provisioning/multiplexing is complete, configure the Output ports as explained in the
following section.

4.8 Configuring the Output Port

The available output ports are as follows:
 ASI - outputs one TS.
 GbE - outputs up to 128 TSs.
Each output port has its own unique configuration parameters. The following section guides
you on how to configure each output port.

4.8.1 Configuring an ASI Output Port

The ASI output port requires you to set the required bit rate and to enable the output port.
 To configure ASI output port
1. Select the required ASI out port.
The Main tab is updated accordingly:

2. To enable the ASI port, select the Enable Port.

3. In Description, enter a short description.
4. To duplicate the traffic that outflow via the port, select Is Mirroring.
You can configure TS Mirroring also when configuring a TS, see TS Mirroring on page 77.
5. SFN mode - currenlty not supported.
6. In Bitrate (bps), type in the required bit rate (bits per second) of the TS.
7. To define packet size, select Packet Size.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 96 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration 8VSB Modulation

4.8.2 Configuring a GbE Output Port

The configuration of a GbE output port includes the following:
 Enabling the port
 GbE port configuration
 GbE socket configuration
 To configure the GbE port
1. In the Output section, select the required GbE port.
The Output Properties section is updates as the following figure shows:

2. Click Port configuration, to set port parameters. See GbE Port Configuration on page 31.
3. Click Socket Configuration, to set socket parameters. See Configuring the Output Socket
Parameters on page 64.
4. Select Enable Port, to enable the output port.
5. Click Apply to send the configuration to the device.

4.9 8VSB Modulation

ProStream supports 8VSB modulation cards that enable reception of ATSC terrestrial TV. See
Viewing/Setting Card Parameters on page 21.
The following table lists the specifications of the 8VSB module:

Table 4-8: 8VSB Specifications

Parameter Specifications

8VSB input card Up to four per device

ATSC receiver modules Up to four per 8VSB input card

(tuner)

Capacity of input port 1 x MPTS

TS frequency Up to 19.39Mbps

Packet size 188 bytes

Channels of ATSC receiver 2-59

modules

Packet Error Rate threshold 0-12,892 packets per seconds

Signal Quality threshold 0.0-27.0dB

ProStream 9000 supports the following applications with 8VSB modules:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 97 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 4 Output Configuration 8VSB Modulation

 8SVB input streams transcoded and output over ASI/GbE output ports. See Video
Transcoding on page 99.
 8SVB input streams multiplexed and output over ASI or GbE output ports with PCR
generation at the output. See Setting PCR PID on page 82.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 98 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 5
Broadcast Transcoding

5.1 Overview
This version of ProStream 9000 with ACETM (Agile Compression Engine) allows you to
transcode video and audio PIDs. This version of ProStream 9000 supports both broadcast
and multiscreen output streams simultaneously.

5.2 Video Transcoding

This version of ProStream 9000 allows to transcode up to 20 HD or up to 60 SD services.
The device transcodes services as follows:
 High Definition (HD) MPEG2/H.264 services to HD MPEG2/H.264 services
 Standard Definition (SD) MPEG2/H.264 services to SD MPEG2/H.264 services
 Downconversion HD MPEG2/H.264 services to SD MPEG2/H264 services
 Microsoft Picture in Picture (PIP) - HD/SD MPEG2/H.264 services to PIP H.264 services.
Microsoft PIP is a low resolution service that complies with Microsoft PIP specifications.
The following table lists the transcoding specifications. For PIP transcoding specifications, see
Table 5-3 on page 101:

Table 5-1: Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation

Density  Density - four cards per unit

Services  HD to HD
 up to 5 services per transcoding card
 up to 20 services per unit

 SD to SD
 up to 15 services per transcoding card
 up to 60 services per unit
Note: Supports any combination of SD and HD services, where 1 HD service
consumes the resources of 3 SD services. See Table 5-2 on page 100.
 HD to SD
 up to 5 services per transcoding card
 up to 20 services per unit

 Microsoft PIP services

 HD to PIP
Up to 5 main services + up to 5PIP services per transcoding card
Up to 20 main services + up to 20PIP services per unit
 SD to PIP
Up to 10 main services + up to 10PIP services per transcoding card
Up to 40 main services + up to 40PIP services per unit

Video Format Input - H.264/MPEG2

Output - H.264/MPEG2

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 99 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding

Table 5-1: Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation

Bit rate  Input - VBR/CBR

 Output - VBR/CBR
 VBR - VBR is in a pool only. For HD, up to 3 services per pool for
best performances.
Note: Currently mixed pools (HD/SD, MPEG2/AVC) are not
supported.
 CBR - CBR with stream control level
 CBR - CBR with service control level

Resolution Horizontal Resolution:

 HD
 720p - supports 1280x720, 960x720
Coverts any to any of the supported types.
 1080i - supports 1920x1080, 1440x1080, 1280x1080
Converts any to any of the supported types
Horizontal Resolution for both 50 and 60 Hz
Vertical Resolution - no conversion, follow the input
 SD
 PAL 50Hz - supports 720/704/640/544/528/480/352 X 576
Converts any to any of the supported types
 NTSC 60Hz - supports 720/704/640/544/528/480/352 X480
Converts any to any of the supported types
For downconversion, see Table 5-4 on page 102.

Frame Rate 50/60Hz

All services in a single ProStream 9000 device are either 50 or 60Hz.

Audio PIDs Passthrough with required delay

PIDs per Service Up to 32 PIDs per transcoded service

Stream Optimizes in/out splicing points for downstream splicing.

conditioning Applies to broadcast in CBR only. See Stream Conditioning for DPI on
page 118.

Table 5-2: Possible Combinations of HD and SD Services per Transcoding Card

SD HD/Downconversion (HD to SD)

15 services None

12 services 1 service

9 services 2 services

6 services 3 services

3 services 4 services

None 5 services

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 100 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding

Table 5-3: PIP Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation

Services See Table 5-1 on page 99.

PIP Service PIP service is always coupled with main service. PIP Service without
Main service is not allowed:
 PIP Service
 points to its main service

 Main Service
 up to one coupled PIP service.
 video format - input MPEG2/H.264 to H.264
 output SD/HD, H.264 CBR/VBR

 Main and PIP services

 have the same video input
 have different H.264 video output
 may outflow on a different TS out or on the same one
 may have different number of Audio/Data PIDs

Video Format  Main Service

 Input - HD/SD
 Output - HD/SD

 PIP Service
 Input - HD/SD
 Output - PIP

Stream Type  Main Service

 Input - H.264/MPEG2
 Output - H.264

 PIP Service
 Input - H.264/MPEG2
 Output - H.264

Bit rate  Main Service

 Input - CBR/VBR
 Output - CBR/VBR

 PIP Service
 Input - CBR/VBR
 Output - CBR, for range see Table 5-13 on page 112.

Resolution Horizontal Resolution:

 Main Service HD
 See Table 5-1 on page 99

 Main Service SD
 See Table 5-1 on page 99

 HD PIP - PIP is coupled with an HD output service

 Supports 128x96 and 192x192

 SD PIP - PIP is coupled with an SD output service

 Supports 96x96, 192x192 and 192x144

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 101 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

Table 5-3: PIP Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation

Miscellaneous  The PIP service follows the Main service configuration of the
Parameters following parameters:
 GOP
 Aspect Ratio
 Mctf

 The PIP service enforces the following configuration for the listed
parameters:
 AFD - Discard
 Closed Captions - Discard
 Other data - Discard
 Adaptation Field Data - Disabled

5.3 Video Transcoding Procedure

You can transcode either of the following:
 an HD/SD service
 a PIP service

5.3.1 Transcoding an HD/SD Service

The following section instructs you on how to transcode an HD/SD service using the web
client of the ProStream 9000 transcoder. The following table lists the required configuration
to allow the transcoding of the video PID of a service:

Table 5-4: Transcoding Required Configuration

Input
Feature Output Stream Explanation
Stream

Video HD/SD HD/SD Supports:

Format
 High Definition (HD)
 Standard Definition (SD)
 Downconversion from HD to SD

Stream H.264/ H.264/MPEG2 Inputs H.264/MPEG2 and

Type MPEG2 transcodes to H.264/MPEG2
In downcoversion, output is MPEG2
only.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 102 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

Table 5-4: Transcoding Required Configuration

Input
Feature Output Stream Explanation
Stream

Resolution N/A Horizontal Resolution:  HR - if input is 720p, transcodes

 HD any 720p supported type to any
 720p - supports 1280x720,
720p supported.
960x720 If input is 1080i, transcodes any
1080i supported type to any
Coverts any to any of the supported
types. 1080i supported type
 1080i - supports 1920x1080,  If input resolution changes, and:
1440x1080, 1280x1080  Output resolution is Follow the
Converts any to any of the supported Input, the output resolution
types changes accordingly without
service interruption assuming
Horizontal Resolution supports both 50
that no gaps are created at the
and 60Hz
input.
Vertical Resolution - no conversion, follow
 Output resolution is configured
the input
to a certain resolution, the
 SD output resolution remain as
 PAL 50Hz - supports 720/704/ output configured resolution.
640/544/528/480/352 X 576  Downconversion - any supported
Converts any to any of the supported input HD resolution to any
types supported SD output resolution.
 NTSC 60Hz - supports 720/ Default output resolution: 720p.
704/640/544/528/480/352
X480  VR - Follow input only.
Converts any to any of the supported Unsupported VR conversion.
types Note: Downcoversion - Output
Vertical resolution is automatically set
according to the input frame rate:
480 - In 60hz
576 - In 50hz

Aspect N/A Follow input Allows to match picture to type of

Ratio 16:9 screen, standard or wide screen.
4:3 See Table 5-7 on page 106.

Bit rate N/A CBR See Defining Output Bitrate of a

VBR Transcoded Service on page 112.

User Data N/A AFD Allows to select which user data to

Closed caption output with the video PID
Other data In Downconversion, define Video
Scaling.

GOP N/A GOP Allows to define GOP related

parameters

PCR PID Any PID Video PID Input - Any PID may input the PCR
PID.
Output - Only video PID may transmit
the PCR PID

The transcoding parameters are grouped in the Video Transcoding tab as explained below. For
PCR configuration, see Setting PCR PID on page 69.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 103 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

 To transcode a Video PID

1. Log into the device.
2. In the Output section, select the required service.
3. Double-click the service node to view its PIDs.
4. To transcode its video PID, select the PID.
5. In the Re Muxing tab, select Transcode.
Select the Video PID

Re Muxing tab

Select the Transcode

option

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 104 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

6. Select the Video Transcoding tab.

Transcoding HD to HD/SD to SD

Downconversion - Transcoding HD to SD

In downconversion Aspect In downconversion,

Ratio is 4:3 or 16:9 Video Scaling is
enabled.

7. To select the input video format, open the Video Format list and select one of the following:
 SD to SD
 HD to HD
 HD to SD
 Any to PIP. See Transcoding a PIP Service on page 110.
8. To select the input stream type, open the Input Stream Type list and select the required
type: H.264 or MPEG2.
9. To select the output stream type, open the Output Stream Type list and select the required
type: H.264 or MPEG2.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 105 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

10. To define the output resolution, open the Output Resolution list and select one of the
following:

Table 5-5: Output Resolution

Output Video
Output Resolution
Format

N/A Follow the input

HD  720p - supports 1280x720, 960x720 for both 50 and 60 HZ

 1080i - supports 1920x1080, 1440x1080, 1280x1080 for both
50 and 60Hz

SD  PAL 50Hz - supports 720/704/640/544/528/480/352 X 576

 NTSC 60Hz - supports 720/704/640/544/528/480/352 X480

11. Open the Profile list and select one of the following according to table:

Table 5-6: Profile Configuration

SD HD

MPEG2 main high

H.264 main/high main/high

12. To configure the required aspect ratio, open the Aspect Ratio list and select one of the
following options according to the video format as Table 5-7 on page 106 explains:
 Follow the input - no changes to the aspect ratio.
 16:9 - (Letter Box) the international standard format of HDTV, non-HD digital
television and analog wide screen television.
 4:3 - (Center Cut) select for standard TV.

Table 5-7: Aspect Ratios and Video Format

Available Aspect
Video Format Explanation
Ratios Option

HD to HD Follow the Input Follow the Input

SD to SD Follow the Input Follow the Input

4:3 4:3
16:9 16:9

HD to SD 4:3 4:3
16:9 16:9

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 106 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

13. Mctf (Motion-Compensated Temporal Filtering) - by default it is off. Mctf affects the video
quality and reduces noises. If the service bit rate is low it is recommended to use strong
Mctf. However, strong Mctf affects the sharpness of the picture. 
To select the required Mctf, open the Mctf list and select the required level ranging from
very weak to very strong.
14. DVB AU Info (DVB Access Unit Information) - you may add data about the stream. You
cannot select the content of data, only whether to add data.
To add data, open the DVB AU Info list and select either Yes or No.
15. PES Insert Rate - This parameters is required for H264 set-top-boxes and it applies to
H264 output streams. Open the PES Insert Rate and select either of the following:
 Every Picture - the default option. PES packets are inserted per field.
 Alternate - PES packets are inserted per frame. 
When output resolution is 720p, always use PES per frame.
16. MP2 Adaptive-PT - applies to PEG2-to-MPEG2 SD, HD, 50/60Hz, CBR/VBR input and
output. When you wish to enable adaptive passthrough, the device automatically enforces
the required configuration. See also Video Quality Enhancement on page 116. 
To enable adaptive passthrough, do the following:
a. In MP2 Adaptive-PT, select Enable. The following message appears:

b. Click OK. The device automatically applies adaptive passthrough.

NOTE: When disabling MP2 Adaptive-PT, the enforced configuration is maintained, but the parameters
are enabled and you need to change their values as required.

17. EBP (Encoder Boundary Point) - by default it is disabled. EBP is a signaling mechanism for
creating fragments or segments from audio or video streams. It also can provide a timing
field to indicate encoding time that can be used for synchronization purposes. EBP
applies to both Broadcast and Multiscreen modes as the following table shows:

EBP Mode Broadcast Multiscreen

Disabled V V

Every GOP V

Every Segment V

To select the required EBP, open the EBP list and select the following:
In Multiscreen mode - see Step h on page page 13.
In Broadcast mode - select either Disable or Every GOP.
For advanced EBP configuration, see Transcoding a PIP Service on page 110.
18. To define the required output bit rate of the stream, focus on the Bitrate section.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 107 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

 Open the Mode list and select either CBR or VBR and configure according to the
following table:
.

Transcoding tab, Bitrate section Transcoding tab, Bitrate section

when CBR is selected when VBR is selected

Table 5-8: CBR and VBR Configuration

CBR Configuration VBR Configuration

 In Rate (bps), enter the required output 1. Open the Pool list and select the required pool.
bit rate. See Table 5-13 on page 112. To create a pool, see Creating a Pool on
page 113.
Note:Currently mixed pools (HD/SD, MPEG2/AVC) are not
supported. See Creating a Pool on page 113.

2. In Min Rate, enter the minimum rate of the video

PID.
Note:Total sum of minimum rates of streams in the pool
should be smaller than pool rate.
See Table 5-12, “Bitrate of a VBR Output Service,” on
page 112.

3. In Max Rate, enter the maximum rate of the video

PID. See Table 5-12, “Bitrate of a VBR Output
Service,” on page 112.

4. Click Pool... to view pool information. See

Understanding the Pool Details Page on
page 115.

NOTE: You can configure the bitrate of the transcoded stream at service level. See Service CBR:
Configuring Bitrate of Transcoded Stream at Service Level on page 119.

19. To manage user data at the output, focus on the User Data section and do the following:
a. Open the Closed Caption list and select one of the following options.:

Closed Caption Option Explanation

Pass Passthrough any closed caption data present in the input

stream

Discard Remove any closed caption data present in the input

stream

Various formats Closed caption data outflows in various formats such as

ATSC A/72, NADBS etc’. Closed caption data format
depends on Video Format and the Stream Type.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 108 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

b. Select Discard Other, to discard all user data except AFD and closed caption data.
c. Select Discard AFD (Active Format Definition), to discard data related to the aspect
ratio of the image.
d. Video Scaling applies to downconversion, HD to SD only. In case of HD to SD, open
the Video Scaling list and select one of the following options:
Force letter-box
Force center-cut
Follow AFD (fallback to letter-box) - default value
Follow AFD (fallback to center-cut)
Squeeze to Anamorphic - only in case the aspect Ratio is 16:9
e. Border Filter applies to broadcast transcoding of SD to SD only. To enable, open the
Border Filter list and select On. The transcoding engine removes the following VBI data
in the video signal:
If input is 480i (NTSC), AMOL (Automated Measurement of Lineups) data is removed.
If input is 576i (PAL), WSS (Wide Screen Signaling) data is removed
In both cases, the VBI data occupies the first active line of video per video field. The
line suppressing functionality will copy the video data from the second line of video
(per field) into the first line of video (per field).

NOTE: Border Filter is not supported if Adaptive Passthrough is selected.

20. To configure GOP related parameters, focus on the GOP section.

21. To select the output GOP structure, open the Mode list and select one of the following
options for the out:

Table 5-9: GOP Mode

Mode Explanation

Follow the Input Default. The GOP mode is as in the input

Fixed GOP The number of frames for inserting the I frame and for
inserting the reference frame (P frame) is fixed.

Variable The number of frames for inserting the I frame changes.

First it is as in the input but may change as required.

Capped Defines the maximum number of frames for inserting the I

frame. The number of frames should never exceed the
value defined in N frames.

Fixed M Defines a fixed number of frames for inserting a reference

frame (P frame) no matter when the I frame is inserted.

To define the number of frames for inserting a P frame, in M Frames, select the required
value. The following table lists the valid M frame values:

Table 5-10: Values of M Frame

Output Stream M Valid Values M Default Values

MPEG2 (HD/SD) 1,2,3 3

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 109 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

Table 5-10: Values of M Frame

Output Stream M Valid Values M Default Values

H.264 SD 1,2,4 4
H.264 HD1080i,

H.264 HD 720p 1,2,4,8 8

22. To define the maximum number of frames in the outgoing GOP, in N frames, enter the
maximum number of frames for inserting the I frame in a range of 6-90.

NOTE: N should be a multiple of M.

23. Open the Open/closed GOP list and select either of the following:
 Follow Input GOP - default option
 Closed GOP - frames from current GOP cannot reference I frames from previous
GOP.
 Open GOP - frames from current GOP can reference I frames from a previous GOP.

5.3.2 Transcoding a PIP Service

The following section instructs you on how to transcode a PIP service using the web client of
the ProStream 9000 transcoder. The following table lists the required configuration to allow
the transcoding of the video PID of a PIP service:

Table 5-11: Required Configuration for Transcoding a PIP Service

Parameter Specification Explanation

Enabling PIP Enable PIP PIP configuration is allowed on the

device

Output Codec H.264

Output 96 × 96
Resolution 92 × 192
128 × 96
192 × 192
192x144

Video Bitrate 100 to 550 Kbps CBR only

Frame Rate 50/60Hz

Service effecting operations for both the main and PIP coupled services:
 Adding/Removing PIP from the main Service
 Recovery from any error condition in main/PIP might result in service interruption to
main/PIP.

NOTE: You cannot delete, disable and un-transcode a main service when a PIP service is coupled with it.

The transcoding parameters are grouped in the Transcoding tab as explained below. For PCR
configuration, see Setting PCR PID on page 69.
 To enable and transcode PIP services

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 110 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page 9.
2. To enable PIP services on the device, select Tools > Video Procession and focus on the ACE
PIP section.

3. Open the PIP Enable list and select Enable.

4. Click Apply.
5. In the Output section, select the required service to be transcoded. The stream is
configured as transcoded in the Main tab of the service configuration.
6. Select the video PID.
7. Select the Transcoding tab.

8. To select the video format, open the Video Format list and select Any to PIP
To define the output resolution, open the Output Resolution list and select one of the
following:
96 × 96
92 × 192
128 × 96
192x144
192 × 192
9. To define the profile, open the Main list and select either Main or Baseline.
10. To define the required output bit rate of the service, focus on the Bitrate section and do
the following:
 In Rate, enter the required output bitrate in bps of the video PID. See Table 5-13 on
page 112

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 111 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

11. To define the main service focus on the PIP section.

 Open the Main Service list and select services that may be coupled with PIP services

NOTE: Main and PIP services have the same input. Any input problem, ensues an alarm on the main
service.

5.3.3 Defining Output Bitrate of a Transcoded Service

In case the output service is a VBR service in a pool, configure it according to the following
table:

Table 5-12: Bitrate of a VBR Output Service

VBR Output Service Min Rate Max Rate

Type (Mbps) (Mbps)

SD MPEG2 0.5 8

HD MPEG2 2 18

SD H.264 0.5 8

HD H.264 1 18

In case the output service is a CBR service, configure it according to the following table:

Table 5-13: Bitrate of a CBR Output Service

CBR Output Service Min Rate Max Rate

Type (Mbps) (Mbps)

SD MPEG2 2 8

HD MPEG2 6 20

SD H.264 1 8

HD H.264 3 18

HD/SD PIP 0.1 0.55

5.3.4 PCR and Video Transcoding

 The PCR PID should outflow over the video PID. To configure it, see Setting PCR PID on
page 69.
 Reference PCR value is indicated for all PIDs of the service. (Select any service PID >
Advanced tab.) Reference PCR indicates the PCR PID in the input. If, the input PCR PID
changes, you need to manually change the Reference PCR PID for every PID of the
transcoded service. Select the PID > Advanced tab.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 112 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

Video PID of the transcoded

service is selected

Ref PCR PID indicating the

PCR PID in the input

 When transcoding a service, PCR Generation Mode is not selected in Service > PCR table,
Generation Mode:.
Transcoded service is
selected

generation Mode is not

selected

5.3.4.1 Transcoding Conventions

The following table lists the conventions for a transcoding service with CBR and VBR bitrate:

Table 5-14: Transcoding Conventions

Convention Explanation

Transcoded service

Transcoded service in a pool

5.3.5 Creating a Pool

1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page 9.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 113 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

2. In the Output section, select Output Hierarchy.

Select the Output Hierarchy

node

To create a pool, select the DT Pool tab.

3. Select the DT Pool tab.

Click to add a pool Click to remove a
selected pool

Enter pool name Enter pool bitrate Click to view pool

details

4. To add a pool, click Add Pool.

5. Define pool parameters as follows:
 Pool ID - Read only. A sequential order of the listed pool.
 Pool Name - Enter a name for the pool.
 Pool Bitrate - The default pool rate is 20bps. Enter the required pool rate in bps.

NOTE: The bitrate of the pool should consider the transport bitrate and allow enough bitrate for
additional PIDs that are included in the TS.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 114 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

6. To view general pool information, click Stream List.

5.3.5.1 Understanding the Pool Details Page

The Pool Detail page provides the following information:
 Pool ID - the ID of the pool.
 Pool Name - the configured name of the pool.
 Pool Bitrate - the configured bitrate of the pool.
 Stream list - a table that lists and shows the following parameters of pool streams:

Table 5-15: Parameters of Streams in a Pool

Parameter Explanation

# Sequential number of the stream

PID The PID

Service Name The name of the service that carries the video PID.

TS Out Details of the output of the TS as follows: Slot: Port: Socket

Video Format Input - HD/SD

Output - HD/SD

Xcode Path Transcoding Type:

H-M - input H.264 to MPEG2 output
M-M - input MPEG2 to MPEG2 output
H-H - input H.264 to H.264 output

Min. Rate The minimum rate of the stream

Max. Rate The maximum rate of the stream

5.3.5.2 Removing a Pool

1. Select Output Hierarchy > DT Pool tab.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 115 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

2. Select the required pool to be removed by clicking the left most column.

To select a pool, click

here

The selected pool record has a darker shade.

Selected pool

NOTE: You can select multi pools by clicking the left most column while pressing the <Ctrl> key.

3. Click Delete Pool to delete the selected pool.

5.3.6 Video Quality Enhancement

To improve the Video Quality (VQ), ProStream 9000 supports Adaptive Passthrough
processing. This type of processing adoptively selects between the following modes, to get
better VQ:
 Full rate shaping
 Full pass-through - where input is passed as is without transcoding. When the output
stream bitrate is higher than the input stream bitrate, the device will mostly operate in full
pass-through (very low input, VBV, may disable pass-through for a short period)
 Partial pass-through - where B-frames only are rate shaped. Partial pass-through tends to
kick-in when output bitrate is slightly lower than input bitrate (i.e. small rate reduction
ratios).

NOTE: Adaptive passthrough processing triggers-in when applicable and you cannot configure it.

Adaptive passthrough applies to the following:

 Video format - SD, HD
 Stream type - MPEG2-to-MPEG2
 Horizontal resolution - 50/60Hz
 Bitrate - CBR/VBR input and output

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 116 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

When adaptive pass-through is enabled, the following configuration is enforced:

 All applicable user configurations (Output Resolution, Aspect Ratio, GOP Mode, Open/
Close GOP) are set to Follow the input
 User Data - Closed Caption is set to Pass
Discard AFD is grayed out
Discard Other is grated out
 AF Data is set to No
 MCTF is set to Off or Very Weak
 Set-top box mode is set to DVB.

NOTE: When input bitrate is high, the adaptive passthrough feature might be disabled.

5.3.7 EBP Advanced Configuration

ProStream with ACE 5.2 and higher, supports Enhanced EBP Signaling. This feature allows to
control the EBP section content.
EBP Information is constructed of 3 sections:
 EBP Tag - A9
 EBP Length - Number of bytes of the data portion.
 Data section - enter data according to the following rules:
 Hex characters valid string, before and/or after the "Time info place holder", if exist.
 Time info place holder - 16 Xs, to imply where to place NTP data.
 Data section Default value is: 88xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
For example:
A909C8xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx - where:
A9 - EBP Tag
09 - Actual Length, in bytes, after this field
C8 - Data section (one byte size)
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx - Time place holder
 To configure enhanced EBP signaling
1. In the Output section, select the required transcoded video PID.
2. In Video Transcoding tab, open the EBP Signaling and select Every GOP.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 117 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

3. Select the Advanced tab.

Enter the EBP data

NOTE: Changing the configuration of EBP Info is not service affecting.

5.3.8 Stream Conditioning for DPI

ProStream with ACE 5.2 supports stream conditioning to optimizes the splice in/out points for
downstream splicing. Stream conditioning, namely, GOP manipulation and VBV management,
on video stream is based on SCTE35 triggers.
Stream conditioning applies to Broadcast, CBR mode.
 To configure stream conditioning
1. In the Output section, drill down to the service with the transcoded video stream.

Drill down to
transcoded
video PID

Select the
SCTE35 stream

Select stream
conditioning

2. Select the SCTE35 elementary stream.

3. In Re-Muxing tab, select Stream Conditioning.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 118 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

5.3.9 Service CBR: Configuring Bitrate of Transcoded Stream at Service Level

ProStream with ACE 5.2 controls the output bitrate at Service level. The transcoded video
bitrate is controlled, to maintain overall constant bitrate for the whole service while
maintaining video quality. When audio or data PIDs are not transferred, the bitrate is
utilized for the video stream. The video bitrate is maximized to the overall bitrate of the
service.

NOTE: To allow CBR with service bitrate control, the video stream should be transcoded.

 To configure transcoded stream at service level

1. In the Output section, select the required service.
2. In the Main tab, focus on the Bitrate section.
Service Main
tab

Bitrate Select Service CBR Enter the required bitrate

section

3. To enable the feature, select Service CBR. The Bitrate box is enabled.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 119 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding Procedure

4. In Bitrate, enter the required service bitrate. This bitrate is maintained as the overall
constant bitrate for the whole service while ensuring video quality. This bitrate appears as
read only in the Video Transcoding tab:

View the service controlled

bitrate

5.3.9.1 Alarm Related to Bitrate Control at Service Level

 In case the bitrate allocated for the video stream is too low, the alarm Service CBR Bitrate
Too Low is raised by the service.
 In case the overall bitrate of non-video streams exceeds the configured service bitrate,
the alarm Service CBR Overflow is raised by the service.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 120 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

5.4 Audio Transcoding

This version of ProStream 9000 allows to transcode also audio PIDs. The density varies
according to the input/output stream type and input/output codecs. See Audio Transcoding
Options and Density on page 123

5.4.1 Audio Transcoding Glossary

Table 5-16: Audio Transcoding Glossary

Term Explanation

AC3 Dolby

E-AC3 Enhanced Dolby

AAC Advanced Audio Coding

ALA Audio Level Adjustment

HE-AAC High-Efficiency Advanced Audio Coding

HE-AAC v1 High-Efficiency Advanced Audio Coding

version 1

HE-AAC v2 High-Efficiency Advanced Audio Coding

version 2

MC Multichannel (5.0/5.1)

MP1L2 MPEG1 Layer II

ST Stereo (2/0), Joint Stereo, Dual, Mono

LFE Low Frequency Effects channel

5.4.2 Audio Transcoding Specifications

The following table presents the audio transcoding specifications:

Table 5-17: Audio Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation

Stream Type See table Table 5-20 on page 124.

Density  To view the number of transcoded PIDs per card, see Table 5-21
on page 124 and Table 5-22 on page 125.
 To view the required processing units, per input/output
transcoding option, see Table 5-23 on page 125.

Number of audio Up to 32
PIDs per
transcoded
service

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 121 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Table 5-17: Audio Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation

Coding Modes  Stereo(2/0) / Joint Stereo / Dual / Mono

 Multi channel
 3/2 + LFE, namely 5.1
 3/2, namely 5.0

Sampling Rate Always follows the input sampling rate: 48KHz

Bit rate  Supported bit rates according to Codec (MP1L2/AAC/AC3) and

Coding Mode (stereo/multichannel), see Table 5-24 on page 126.
 CBR output only

Copyright  Copyright - Original

Processing
 Copyright - Copy
 Not Copyright - Original
 Not Copyright - Copy
 Follow the input.

Audio Level  According to Junger Level MagicTM. Adjusts the audio level from
Adjustment any source at any time to a given reference level.
 Fixed gain - in case ALA is not used, you can configure Fixed Gain
adjustments.

Error Handling Full support of Silence Mode. If enabled, silence is inserted in cases of
corrupt/missing audio input.

Output PCR Supports PCR on audio PIDs.

PES per Frame One to six frames per PES.

Audio The device generates and adds the required descriptors to the
Descriptors transcoded audio PID according to the transcoding output
configuration.

Synchronization Allows adjustment of audio delay (PTS) to compensate for input with
Compensation A/V synchronization problems.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 122 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

5.4.3 Specific Codec Specifications

5.4.3.1 MPEG1 Layer 2
Table 5-18: MPEG1L2 Specifications

Parameter Specification

Error Protection Supports error protection

5.4.3.2 AAC
Table 5-19: AAC Specifications

Parameter Specification

AAC Coding Extensions Supports the following:

 MPEG-4 AAC (LC)
 MPEG-4 HE AAC
 MPEG-4 HE AAC v2
 MPEG-2 AAC (LC)
 MPEG-2 HE AAC
 MPEG-2 HE AAC v2

Transport Format  ADTS

 LATM

TNS Supports Temporal Noise Shaping

PNS Supports Perceptual Noise Substitution

5.4.3.3 Dolby®
Supports Dolby specifications for AC-3 and E-AC-3. For Dolby supported parameters, see
table Table 5-25 on page 127.

5.4.3.4 Audio Transcoding Options and Density

The device transcodes audio PIDs as listed in table Table 5-20 on page 124.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 123 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Table 5-20: Audio Transcoding Options

Output AAC Dolby

MP1l2
HE-
Input AAC LC HE-AAC V1 AAC AC3 E-AC3
V2
ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC
MP1L2 ST V V V V V V V V V V
ST V V V V V V V V V V
AAC LC
MC V V V V V V V V V V
HE-AAC ST V V V V V V V V V V
AAC
V1 MC V V V V V V V V V V
HE-AAC ST V V V V V V V V V V
V2
Dolby AC3 ST V V V V V V V V V V
MC V V V V V V V V V V
E-AC3 ST V V V V V V V V V V
MC V V V V V V V V V V

The following table lists the possible combinations of audio transcoding per transcoding card.
In Table 5-21, the numbers do not include ALA processing.
In Table 5-22, the numbers include ALA processing.
To define audio transcoding combinations, also use table Table 5-23 on page 125.

Table 5-21: Audio Transcoding Density without ALA

MP1L2 AAC Dolby

HE-
AAC LC HE-AAC V1 AC3 E-AC3
AAC V2
Output
Input ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC

MP1L2 ST 60 48 23 33 14 38 18 12 12 6
AAC ST 46 38 20 28 13 31 16 11 12 6
(all flavours) MC 27 24 16 20 11 21 13 10 10 5
Dolby ACE ST/MC 33 29 18 23 12 25 14 10 10 5
Dolby E-AC3 ST/MC 22 20 14 17 10 18 12 9 9 5

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 124 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Table 5-22: Audio Transcoding Density with ALA

MP1L2 AAC Dolby

HE-AAC
AAC LC HE-AAC V1 AC3 E-AC3
Output V2

Input ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC

MP1L2 ST 30 27 14 21 10 23 14 9 10 5
AAC ST 26 23 13 19 9 20 13 8 10 5
(all flavours) MC 18 17 11 15 8 16 11 7 8 4
Dolby AC3 ST/MC 21 19 12 16 9 17 11 8 9 5
Dolby E-AC3 ST/MC 16 15 10 13 8 14 10 7 8 4

The following table, Table 5-23, lists the required processing units, per input/output
transcoding option. Use this table for defining maximum capacity, per card, of any stream
combination.

NOTE: A single card has total of 3750 processing units.

ALA requires more processing units:

 ALA ST (2.0) requires additional 61 processing units
 ALA MC (5.0/5.1) requires additional 104 processing units
For example
MP1L2 to MP1L2 (Stereo) without ALA: requires 63 processing units
MP1L2 to MP1L2 (Stereo) with ALA: 63+61 = 123 processing units:

Table 5-23: Audio Transcoding Required Processing Units

MP1L2 AAC Dolby

HE-AAC
AAC LC HE-AAC V1 AC3 E-AC3
V2
Output
ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC
Input
MP1L2 ST 63 79 164 114 268 99 209 313 313 625
AAC ST 82 99 188 134 289 121 235 341 313 625
(all flavours) MC 139 157 235 188 341 179 289 375 375 750
Dolby AC3 ST/MC 114 129 208 163 306 150 255 348 342 627
Dolby E-AC3 ST/MC 168 184 263 218 360 205 310 403 397 681

5.4.3.5 Audio Transcoding Bitrate

The following table lists the audio ES bitrate in kbps. The allowed bitrate values are according
to input/output stream type - MP1L2/AAC/AC3 and Coding Mode - single/stereo/multi
channel.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 125 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Bitrate default values:

 192kbps - for Single/Stereo channel
 384kbps - for Multi channel

Table 5-24: Audio Transcoding - Output Bitrate

Output Audio Codec ES Bitrate (Kbps)

MP1L2 stereo (2.0) 32 - 384

AAC stereo (2.0) 32 - 384

AAC multi-channel (5.1) 224 - 640

HE AACv1 stereo (2.0) 32 - 128

HE AAC v1 multi-channel (5.1) 96 - 192

HE AAC V2 stereo (2.0) 32 -64

Dolby Digital (AC-3) stereo (2.0) 96 - 640

Dolby Digital (AC-3) multi-channel (5.1) 32 - 640

E-Dolby Digital (E-AC3) stereo/multi-channel 32-1024

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 126 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

5.4.3.6 Dolby® Supported Parameters

Table 5-25: Dolby Supported Parameters

Topic Parameter

Bitstream Information (BSI) Bit Stream Mode

Dialog Normalization

Production Information (mix level and room type)

BSI Extension Stereo Downmix Preference

Mix Levels

Surround EX Mode

Head Phone Mode

A/D Converter Type

Alternate BSI Syntax

E-AC3 additional Source Sample Rate

configuration
Stream Type

Sub Stream ID

Processing DC High Pass Filter

Bandwidth Low Pass Filter

Digital De-emphasize

Dynamic Range Compression

Multichannel Processing LFE Low Pass Filter

90 Degree Phase Shift

3 dB Attenuation

5.5 Audio Transcoding Procedure

 To transcode an audio PID
1. Log into the device.
2. In the Output section, select the required service.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 127 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

3. Double click the service node to view its PIDs.

Select the Audio PID

Re Muxing tab

Select the
Transcode
option

4. Select the required audio PID.

5. In the Re Muxing tab, select Transcode.
6. Select the Audio Transcoding tab.

7. To select the input stream type, open the Input Stream Type list and select one of the
following:
 MPEG1 Layer II (0x3)
 MPEG1 Layer II (0x4)
 AC-3/e_AC-3 DVB 90x6)
 ACC in ADTS (0xF)
 ACC in LATM (0x11)
 AC-3 ATSC (0x81)
 E-AC-3 ATSC (0x87)
8. To select the Output stream type, open the Output Stream Type list and select the required
type:
 MPEG1 Layer II (0x3)
 MPEG1 Layer II (0x4)

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 128 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

 AC-3/E-AC-3 DVB (0x6)

 ACC in ADTS (0xF)
 ACC in LATM (0x11)
 AC-3 ATSC (0x81)
 E-AC-3 ATSC (0x87)
9. Input Coding Mode - allows to allocate trandcoding resources. If the coding of the input
stream is unknown, whether ST - less resources, or MC - more resources, select Any. If ST
is selected and the input coding is MC, an alarm is raised. 
To select the input coding mode, open the Input Coding Mode list and select the required
coding mode. Coding mode options depend on the selected input stream type as the
following table lists:

Table 5-26: Input Coding Options according to Input Stream Type

Input Stream Type Input Coding Options

MPEG1 Layer II Any input coding. Not configurable

AC-3/E-AC-3 all flavors Any

ACC
Stereo/Mono

Multichannel

10. Decoding Format - allows to allocate trandcoding resources. If the decoding format of the
input stream is unknown, select Any. If a low MHz decoder (AAC LC / AC3) is selected
and the actual decoding format is a high MHz decoder (AAC HE / E-AC3), an alarm is
raised.
To select the input decoding format, open the Decoding Format list and select the required
decoding format. Decoding format options depend on the selected input stream type as
the following table lists:.

Table 5-27: Input Decoding Format Options according to Input Stream

Input Stream Type Decoding Format Options

MPEG1 Layer II Any decoding format. Not configurable

AC-3 ATSC

E-AC-3 ATSC

AC-3/E-AC-3 DVB Any

AC-3 (default)

E-AC-3

AAC Any input decoding format

AAC LC

ACC HE

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 129 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

11. To select the output coding mode, open the Output Coding Mode list and select the
required coding mode. Coding mode options depend on the selected output stream type
as the following table lists:

Table 5-28: Output Coding Options according to Output Stream Type

HE AAC HE AAC
Output Coding Options MPEG1L2 AAC AC3/E-AC3
V1 V2
Follow the input V V V V
Stereo (2/0) V V V V V
Single channel left (1/0) V V V V
Single channel right (1/0) V V V V
Dual Mono (1+) V V V V
Joint Stereo (2/0) V
Multi Channel (3/2) V V V
Multi Channel (3/2 LFE) V V V

NOTE: Any changes to input/output Codec, input/output Coding Mode and output AAC is service
affecting.

12. To define the ES bitrate in kbps, open the ES Bitrate list and select the required output ES
bitrate. The bitrate list is updated according to the output stream type and the selected
output codec. See Table 5-24 on page 126.
TS Bitrate is updated to display the total TS bitrate. View TS bitrate in TS Bitrate box.
13. Transcoded audio streams may carry PCR. To carry a PCR select the Insert PCR box.

NOTE: Sampling rate is always Follow the input. Sampling rate is 48 kHz and it is not converted.

14. To configure advanced audio transcoding options, click Advanced.

Advanced
section

15. To select the required copyright mode, open the Copyright Signaling list and select one of
the following
 Copyright - Original: indicates that the audio stream is copyright protected by the
original copyright bitstream
 Copyright - Copy: indicates that the audio stream is copyright protected by a copy of
the copyright bitstream
 Not Copyright: Original - the original audio stream is not copyright protected
 Not Copyright: Copy - the copy of the audio stream is not copyright protected

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 130 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

 Follow the input

16. PES per Frame - to control the number of Audio frames that are packed in a single PES
(Packetized Elementary Stream), open the Frames per PES list and select the required
number between one to six. Six is the default.
17. Fixed Gain (dB) - If ALA is not used, you may configure a fixed gain adjustment for the
output audio stream. It increases/decreases the audio volume by a fixed dB value. The
valid range is (-20) to 0 dB and the default value is 0. See Configuring Audio Level
Adjustment on page 139.
18. Audio Sync Compensation (msec) - to adjust audio delay (PTS) to compensate for input with
A/V synchronization problems, enter the required value, between (-500) to 500ms. The
default value is 0.

5.5.1 Configuration Following the Output Stream Type

Output stream type, allows configuration specific to this stream type. The Audio Transcoding
tab changes to allow this specific configuration as the following sections indicate.

5.5.1.1 Specific MPEG1L2 Configuration

The instructions below assume that the output stream type is MPEG1 Layer II.
1. Assuming that in Audio Transcoding tab, in Output Stream Type you have selected MPEG1
Layer II.
The MP1L2 menu appears (below the Advanced menu)

Output stream type is MP1L2 menu appears

MPEG1 Layer2

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 131 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

2. To configure, click MP1L2 menu.

MPEG1l2 specific configuration

3. To enable error protection, select the Error Protection box.

5.5.1.2 Specific AAC Configuration

AAC and HE AAC can be encapsulated in the output transport stream in either of the
following methods:
 ADTS (Audio Data Transport Stream) is the encapsulation method used if you select
MPEG-2 HE AAC as the coding mode extension. ADTS is assigned a stream type value of
0x0F.
 LATM (Low-overhead Audio Transport Multiplex) is the default encapsulation method
used if you select MPEG-4 HE AAC as the coding mode extension. LATM is assigned a
stream type value of 0x11.
 To define specific AAC configuration
The instructions below assume that the output stream type is AAC or HE AAC.
1. Assuming that in Audio Transcoding tab, in Output Stream Type you have selected ACC or HE
ACC
The ACC menu appears (below the Advanced menu).

ACC specific configuration

2. To select a coding extension, open the Coding Mode list and select one of the following:
 MPEG-4 AAC (LC)
 MPEG-4 HE AAC
 MPEG-4 HE AAC v2

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 132 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

 MPEG-2 AAC (LC)

 MPEG-2 HE AAC
 MPEG-2 HE AAC v2
3. To enable Temporal Noise Shaping (TNS), select TNS.
4. To enable Perceptual Noise Substitution (PNS), select PNS. When Coding Mode is MPEG-2,
PNS is selected not configurable. When Coding Mode is MPEG-4, PNS is selected and is
configurable.
5. To enable error protection, select Error Protection.

5.5.1.3 Specific Dolby ® AC-3TM/E-AC-3TM Configuration

The instructions below assume that the output stream type is AC-3 all flavours.
1. Assuming that in Audio Transcoding tab, in Output Stream Type, you have selected an AC-3
stream or any of its flavors.
The AC-3/E-AC-3 menu appears (below the Advanced menu)

Output stream type is AC-3/E-AC-3 menu

AC-3(all flavors) appears

2. Click the AC-3/E-AC-3 menu.

3. To configure, open the required menu and define parameters as explained in the
following sections:
General menu, see AC-3 All Flavors General Menu on page 134
Audio Service Configuration, see AC-3 All Flavors Service Configuration Menu on
page 134
Bitstream, see AC-3All Flavors Bitstream Menu on page 135
Preprocessing, see AC-3 All Flavors Preprocessing Menu on page 136

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 133 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

Multichannel, see AC-3 All Flavors Multichannel Menu on page 138

BSI Extension, see AC-3 All Flavors BSI Extension Menu on page 138

AC-3 All Flavors General Menu

1. Click the General menu.

2. The Encoding Format list is enabled for output stream type AC-3/E-AC-3 only. In this case,
select either AC-3, Dolby, or E-AC-3, Dolby plus.

AC-3 All Flavors Service Configuration Menu

1. Click the Audio Service Configuration menu.

2. The bitstream mode describes the audio service contained within the Dolby Digital
bitstream. The stream can carry a main audio service or an associated service. The
default bit stream mode is Complete Main. Open the Bit Stream Mode list and select one of
the following modes:
 Follow the input
 Main audio: Complete Main - A complete audio service that includes dialog, music,
and effects. You can supplement a complete audio service with visually impaired,
hearing impaired, commentary, emergency, and karaoke/voice-over associated
services.
 Main Audio: Music and Effects - An associated service with music and effects but no
dialog for the program. You can add the dialog by providing a dialog-associated
service.
 Associated: Visually Impaired - An associated service with a narrative description of
the program's visual content. Audio service for the visually impaired allows the viewer
to enjoy the audio aspects with a commentary of the visual aspects of the program.
 Associated: Hearing Impaired - An associated service with a single channel of dialog
but no music or effects. For the hearing-impaired viewer, the dialog is easier to
understand without the combination of music and sound effects in the audio stream.
 Associated: Dialogue - An associated service with multiple channels for several
different languages.
 Associated: Commentary - An associated service similar to the dialog-associated
service that provides optional program commentary, not the primary dialog for the
program. Used for added commentary during sporting events or educational

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 134 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

programming.
 Associated: Emergency - An associated service with audio tones that accompany
emergency announcements. The tones replace the main audio of a program.
 Main/Associated: Karaoke/Voice-Over - An associated service similar to the
emergency-associated service, but karaoke audio tones do not replace the main
audio of a program.
3. Dialog Normalization (dBFS) - (Also known as dialnorm.) The single most important Dolby
Digital metadata parameter. Its setting represents the average loudness of dialog in a
presentation, and is defined in terms of decibels below 0 dBFS.
When received at the consumer’s Dolby Digital decoder, this parameter setting
determines the level shift in the decoder that sets, or normalizes, the average audio
output of the decoder to a preset level. This aids in matching audio volume between
program sources. A dialnorm value of –31 results in no level shift, a value of –1 results in
maximum level shift.
The proper setting of the dialog level parameter enables the Dynamic Range Control
profiles chosen by the content producer to work as intended in less-than-optimal listening
environments.
To select the required value, open the Dialog Normalization (dBFS) and select either of the
following values: Follow the Input, or a value between -1 to -31(dBFS).

AC-3All Flavors Bitstream Menu

The parameters in the Bitstream menu relate directly to the Dolby Digital Plus bitstream
information fields.
1. Click the Bitstream menu.

Bitstream when output type is AC-3

and encoding type is AC-3

Bitstream when output

type is E-AC-3 ASTC

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 135 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

2. Surround Mode - indicates whether the two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) stream contains
a Dolby Surround (Lt/Rt) program that requires Dolby Pro LogicR decoding. Open the
Surround Mode list and select one of the following modes:
 Follow the input
 No indication
 Not Encoded in Dolby Surround - The bitstream contains information not encoded in
Dolby Surround.
 Encoded in Dolby Surround - The bitstream contains information encoded in Dolby
Surround. After
3. Mix Level (dBSPL) - describes the peak sound pressure level (SPL) used during the final
mixing session at the studio or on the dubbing stage. Open the Mix Level (dBSPL) list and
select one of the following:
 Follow the input
 A value between 80 to 111dB, in 1 dB increments
4. Room Type - describes the equalization used during the final mixing session at the studio
or on the dubbing stage. A large room is a dubbing stage with the industry standard 
X-curve equalization; a small room has flat equalization. This parameter allows an
amplifier to be set to the same equalization as heard in the final mixing environment.
Open the Room Type list and select one of the following:
 Follow the input
 Not indicated - The room type is not identified in the stream
 Large room, X curve monitor - Film-style dubbing stage, x-curve monitoring
 Small room, flat monitor - Typical recording studio, flat monitoring
5. AC-3 Center Mix Level (dB) - applies to Encoding Format AC-3 only. It indicates the level
shift applied to the C channel when adding to the L and R outputs as a result of
downmixing to an Lt/Rt output. Open the AC-3 Center Mix Level (dB) list and select one of
the following:
 Follow the Input
 -3
 -4.5
 -6
1. AC-3 Surround Mix Level (dB) - applies to applies to Encoding Format AC-3 only.
indicates the level shift applied to the surround channels when downmixing to an Lt/Rt
output. Open the AC-3 Surround Mix Level (dB) list and select one of the following:
 Follow the Input
 -3
 -6


AC-3 All Flavors Preprocessing Menu

The parameters listed in the Preprocessing menu are associated with the preconditioning of
audio input signals before they are transcoded.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 136 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

1. Click the Preprocessing menu.

2. DC HighPass Filter - by default this filter is enabled. If selected, activates a 3-Hz direct
current (DC) filter for all input channels. The DC filter removes any inaudible low
frequency signals and also any DC bias in the input signal.
3. Bandwidth LowPass Filter - select to enable this filter. If selected, activates a bandwidth
low pass filter with a cut-off close to the audio bit rate you specified.
4. Digital De-emphasize - Specifies whether de-emphasis is on or off. In some cases, an
audio signal may be scaled with a 50/15 microsecond pre-emphasis prior to its
transmission.
5. Dynamic Range Compression (DRC)- Different home listening environments present a
wide range of requirements regarding dynamic range. Rather than simply compressing
the audio program to work well in the poorest listening environments, Dolby Digital
encoders can calculate Dynamic Range Control (DRC) information and send it via the
Line Mode and RF Mode metadata parameters to the consumer decoder. This metadata
can then be applied to the audio signal by the decoder to reduce its dynamic range.
Through the proper setting of DRC profiles during content creation, the producer can
provide the best possible presentation of program content in virtually any listening
environment, regardless of the quality of the equipment, number of channels, or ambient
noise level in the consumer’s home.
Six preset DRC profiles are available to content producers: Film Light, Film Standard,
Music Light, Music Standard, Speech, and None. Each is applied with the values shown
below.
To set the required Dynamic Range Compression, open the DRC list and select the profile
that represents the acceptable range for the program type as explained below. You can
select:
 None
 Film Standard and Film Light - In most movies, the dialog is the softest audible part of
the sound track. Anything softer in volume than the dialog may not be heard in a
typical movie theatre. Therefore, movie sound tracks require only a small amount of
volume boost for low levels. Too much boost of low-level audio may reveal
unintended sounds in the audio sound track, such as camera reels and background
traffic noise that were recorded during production. Dolby recommends setting Film
Standard for most program material.
 Music Standard and Music Light - The acceptable volume range is determined by the
music type. Most music has a limited variation in volume range, but you must set an
acceptable level so the sound is not too far above other programming.
 Speech - Most speech sources have limited dynamic range of audio fluctuation.
However, some speech sources can have moments that are abnormally loud or soft.
The Speech profile uses a 10 dB acceptable range for average speech. If the speech

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 137 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

source contains a heavy amount of background noise, use Film Standard or Film Light
so the background noise is not audible during gaps in the speech content.

AC-3 All Flavors Multichannel Menu

This menu is available for Dolby AC-3 audio streams when Multichannel coding mode is
selected.
1. Click the Multichannel menu.

NOTE: Output Coding Mode should be Follow the input or Multichannel.3/2 and 3/2+LFE

2. LFE LowPass Filter - must be provided only if the LFE channel is enabled. Select the LFE
LowPass Filter box to turn on low-pass filter for low-frequency effects.
3. The following fields allow you to enable processing options for the surround audio
channel:
 90 Degree Phase Shift - Select to modulate the phase of the reference signal by 90
degrees.
 dB attenuation - Select to enable 3 dB attenuation of the surround audio.

AC-3 All Flavors BSI Extension Menu

Bitstream extended information is additional information to be carried about the audio
program and also more choices for stereo downmixing. When the metadata parameters
carried in Dolby Digital were first described, they were generically called bitstream
information, or BSI. The additional parameter definitions are called extended BSI.
1. Click the BSI Extension menu.

NOTE: Output Coding Mode should be Follow the input or Multichannel.3/2 and 3/2+LFE

2. AC-3 Alternate BSI Syntax - Select to enable the following BSI extension parameters.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 138 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

3. Stereo Downmix Preference - Indicates whether the preferred stereo downmix is one of the
following:
 Not Indicated
 Lt/Rt Downmix Preferred - left total/right total
 Lo/Ro Downmix Preferred - stereo left only/stereo right only
4. Lt/Rt Surround Mix Level - select the surround mix level for left total/right total downmixing.
5. Lo/Ro Surround Mix Level - select the surround mix level for left only/stereo right only
downmixing
6. Head Phone Mode - select one of the following:
 Not Indicated
 Not Encoded in Dolby Headphone
 Encoded in Dolby Headphone
7. Lt/Rt Center Mix Level - select the center mix level for left total/right total downmixing.
8. Lo/Ro Center Mix Level - select the center mix level for left only/stereo right only
downmixing
9. Surround EX Mode - indicates whether the audio is encoded for Dolby ® Digital Surround
EXTM. Select one of the following:
 Not Indicated
 Not Encoded in Dolby Surround EX
 Encoded in Dolby Surround EX
10. A/D Converter Type - Select the type of analog-to-digital converter: Standard or HDCD
Encoded.

5.5.1.4 Configuring Audio Level Adjustment

1. In the Audio Transcoding tab, click Audio Level Adjustment.

2. Under General, configure the following parameters:

 ALA Enable - enables the ALA according to Level Magic LM™ - an adaptive level
control algorithm capable of adjusting audio level from any source at any time to a
given reference level.
Enable when incoming source levels vary widely between channels (Service A seems
twice as loud as Service B), or when transient audio level changes within the same
channel during commercial break, explosions or loud music Vs. dialogs.
Once you select this option Link Mode and Input Gain are enabled and additional
menus appear:
Automatic Gain Control - see Automatic Gain Control (AGC) on page 140

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 139 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

Transient Processor - see Transient Processor on page 141

Limiter - see Limiter on page 141

 Link Mode - use for multichannel (5.1) streams. There are two options for LFE control:
Unlinked Derived - Default. LFE follows the Input Gain (dB) configuration of 3/2.
Unlinked Adjustable - LFE may have different Input Gain (dB) configuration than 3/2.
Once you select this option, Input Gain (dB) box appears also for LFE

 Input Gain (dB) - Allows to configure the input signal level towards the target loudness
level that streams into the ALA module. You may configure this parameter in case the
input loudness level is received distorted and you need to fix the audio level before
the ALA processing module. Enter the required value between -20 to +20dB in steps
of 0.1dB
When ALA Enable is selected, additional menus appear. The following sections describe
these menus.

Automatic Gain Control (AGC)

Use the AGC to adjust the output level by performing slow gain changes.
1. Click the Automatic Gain Control menu.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 140 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

2. Configure the parameters as explained below for 3/2 and LFE:

TIP: Loudness Target (LKFS) is the main parameter when configuring the ALA processing module.

 Loudness Target (LKFS) - Allows to configure the desired output loudness level in
LKFS (Loudness, K-weighted, relative to Full Scale). A unit of LKFS is equivalent to a
decibel. The default is 24.
 Time - The amount of time the ALA module takes to scale incoming audio with
loudness levels not at target. The time range is from 1 second to 9000 seconds.
 Max. Gain - Limits the maximum amplification allowed by the AGC module.The range
available is 0 to 20dB in steps of 0.1 dB.
 Freeze Level - Allows avoiding the undesired gain increase during signal breaks and
overshoots by following signal attack. If the input signal level decreases and reaches
the freeze level, all the states of AGC (leveler) and transient processor are frozen and
kept unchanged until the input signal level rises again. The range available is 0 to-70
in steps of 0.1dB.

Transient Processor
Use the Transient processor to adjust the output level by performing fast gain changes.
1. Click the Transient Processor menu.

2. Configure the parameters as explained below for 3/2 and LFE:

 Response - Indicates the characteristic of gain change by the transient processor.
Response value depends on your program genre. Three values are available: soft,
mid (default) and hard.
Soft - select, in case there are just a few level changes or if you want to keep the
original dynamic range best (e.g. classical music)
Mid - select for mixed program
Hard - select for live venues (sport etc.) with frequent unexpected level changes
 Max. Gain - Limits the maximum amplification allowed by the Transient processor
module. The range available is 0 to 20 dB in steps of 0.1 dB.

Limiter
The Audio brick wall limiter guarantees precise peak limiting without any distortion.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 141 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

1. Click the Limiter menu.

2. Configure the parameters as explained below for 3/2 and LFE:

 Max. Peak Level (dBFS) - The maximum loudness level. Dynamic audio level
adjustment processing will ensure that audio loudness is below Max Peak Level. The
default is –6.
 Processing - Allows to define the behavior of the limiter, mostly affecting the release
of the limiter audio level reduction. Several processing modes are available: Live,
Speech, Universal (default) and Classic.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 142 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Chapter 6
Multiscreen Transcoding

6.1 Overview
This version of ProStream 9000 transcodes services and may output them also as
multiscreen compliant services. ProStream 9000 produces a valid output for mobile web
devices that support multi-bitrate switching such as Apple iPhone, Microsoft Silverlight
Smoothing Streaming Player, Adobe Flash Player.

NOTE: ProStream 9000 may simultaneously transcode broadcast streams and multiscreen
compliant streams. See Broadcast Transcoding on page 3.

To comply with multiscreen specifications, ProStream 9000 outputs an MBTS (Multi Bitrate
Transport Stream). MBTS is composed of SPTSs (Single Program Transport Streams), or
several profiles that output the same service data in different quality levels. The following
illustration shows a typical MBTS with three profiles:

6.1.1 Glossary
The following table lists transcoding multiscreen common terminology:

Table 6-1: Transcoding Multiscreen Terminology

Item Explanation

ABR Average Bitrate

CBR Constant Bitrate

HD High Definition video format

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 143 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6-1: Transcoding Multiscreen Terminology

Item Explanation

MBTS Multi Bitrate Transport Stream

PTS Presentation Time Stamp

SAR Sample Aspect Ratio

SPTS Single Program Transport Stream

SD Standard Definition video format

Sub-SD This video format includes all resolutions that are below
the resolutions supported by SD.

VBR Variable Bitrate

The following table lists the transcoding multiscreen specifications:

Table 6-2: Transcoding Multiscreen Specifications

Specification Explanation

Density  Density - four ACE cards per unit

Services  Video
Each transcoding engine - per single input:
 Up to 2 HD output profiles
 Up to 4 SD output profiles
 Up to 1 HD and 2 SD output profiles
 Up to 1 HD and 3 Sub SD output profiles
The number of supported services depends on the mix of profile
resolutions. For example, in 50Hz, SD low resolution supports 1 HD
and 3 SD. For exact density per use case, refer to product spec and/
or call to customer support.

Fully populated platform - 4 ACE cards:

 20 Input services that outflow in MBTS that includes 1-4 output
profiles
 10 Input services that outflow in MBTS that includes 5-8 output
profiles
 6 Input services that outflow in MBTS that includes 9-12 output
profiles
 any of the above mentioned combinations with total of 80
profiles per device
 Audio
Density of audio streams is according to ACE Audio transcoding spec.

Video Format Input - H.264/MPEG2

Output - H.264

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 144 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6-2: Transcoding Multiscreen Specifications

Specification Explanation

Bitrate Input - VBR/CBR

Output - CBR/ABR. Available output bitrate range depends on the
input video format. For available output bitrate ranges, see:
 HD - Table 6-3 on page 147
 SD Table 6-4 on page 148
 Sub SD Table 6-5 on page 149

Output Depends on the input video format. For available resolutions, see:
Resolution
 HD - Table 6-3 on page 147
 SD Table 6-4 on page 148
 Sub SD Table 6-5 on page 149

H.264 Profiles  Profiles

and levels  Supported profiles for HD, SD and Sub SD: High, Main and
Baseline.
 Supported Levels:
 HD - 3.1
 SD - 3.0
 Sub-SD - 1.2, 1.3, 2.1 and 3.0

Output Frame  Full frame rate:

Rate  29.97 fps for 60Hz (default)
 25 fps for 50Hz (default)

 Half frame rate:

 14.985 fps for 60Hz
 12.5 fps for 50 Hz

Output Scan Progressive

Rate

MBTS (Multi  Up to 12 profiles per MBTS

Bitrate Transport
 Each MBTS may include up to 25 PIDs in according to the
Stream)
following:
 Video PID - mandatory one transcoded video PID.
 Audio PIDs.
 Data/Passthrough PIDs

 Adding/removing multiscreen output video PID to a profile is

service affecting for all PIDs in the profile (temporary interruption -
up to 10 sec)

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 145 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6-2: Transcoding Multiscreen Specifications

Specification Explanation

Video Frequency Configured at device level and applies to all video PIDs. The default is
60 Hz.
In case of mismatch between the configured frequency and actual PID
frequency the following takes place:
 The alarm Unsupported Frame Rate is raised on the PID
 The video PID is not transmitted

Changes to the frequency of the video PID ensue the reset of the
transcoding engine. Video PID frequency may change due to the
upstream source, or at device level.

IDR Alignment IDR frames inserted across all video streams in the MBTS should have
identical Presentation Time Stamp (PTS).

Input / Output Input - GbE / ASI / 8VSB

interfaces Output - GbE

PMT PID Sorting - all programs in a specific MBTS have the same PMT
ordering.

Audio Spec.  Input

 Codecs - any (MP1L2, AC3/E-AC3, AAC)
 Coding Modes - Multichannel, Stereo, Mono

 Output
 Codecs - AAC LC.
 Coding Modes - Stereo (default), Mono

 Bitrates - 96k (default) and all other supported bitrates

 Audio configuration - according to ACE Audio transcoding spec.

Data PIDs Passthrough with proper delay to match multiscreen system delay

System Integrated with the following "Packager" platforms

interop
 Harmonic ProMediaRT
 Envivio
 Anevia
 Wowza

System Delay 5.2 seconds

EBP Signaling Supports Encoder Boundary Point (EBP) standard, according to

CableLabs Specifications.

6.1.2 HD/SD/Sub-SD Specifications

ACE 5.1 and higher supports a wide range of resolutions to allow flexibility. Following are the
supported resolutions.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 146 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

NOTE: HD output - any output resolution that is greater than 720W or 576H.

Table 6-3: HD Output Specifications

Default
Input Bitrate
Resolution Bitrate
Format (kbps)
(kbps)

1280x720 HD 1750-6000 3500

1152x648 HD 1750-6000 3500

1024x768 HD 1750-6000 3500

1024x720 HD 1750-6000 3500

1024x576 HD 1750-6000 2000

960x720 HD 1400-6000 2000

960x640 HD 1400-6000 2000

960x540 HD 1400-6000 2000

920x720 HD 1400-6000 2000

912x512 HD 1400-6000 2000

864x486 HD 1400-6000 2000

854x480 HD 1400-6000 2000

852x480 HD 1400-6000 2000

848x480 HD 1400-6000 2000

840x486 HD 1400-6000 2000

832x464 HD 1400-6000 2000

800x480 HD 1400-6000 2000

800x450 HD 1400-6000 2000

768x432 HD 1400-6000 2000

750x576 HD 1400-6000 2000

720x578 HD 1400-6000 2000

NOTE: For 1024x768 - In case the input is 720p, force output to be equal to input Vertical resolution
(1024x720) and Input Vertical Resolution Mismatch alarm is raised.
Up conversion (SD to HD) is not supported.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 147 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6-4: SD Output Specifications

Default
Input Bitrate
Resolution Bitrate
Format (kbps)
(kbps)

720x576 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x528 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x480 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x432 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x404 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x400 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x384 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

704x576 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

704x528 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

704x396 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

656x368 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x576 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x480 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x380 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x360 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x320 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x240 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

576x464 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

576x432 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

576x352 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

576x324 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

568x320 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

544x304 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

528x480 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

528x400 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 148 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6-5: Sub-SD Output Specifications

Default
Input Bitrate
Resolution Bitrate
Format (kbps)
(kbps)

524x240 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

512x384 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

512x288 SD/HD 500-1000 1500

480x360 SD/HD 500-1000 750

480x352 SD/HD 500-1000 750

480x320 SD/HD 500-1000 750

480x272 SD/HD 500-1000 750

480x270 SD/HD 500-1000 750

464x368 SD/HD 500-1000 750

448x336 SD/HD 500-1000 750

448x256 SD/HD 500-1000 750

448x252 SD/HD 500-1000 750

444x250 SD/HD 500-1000 750

432x240 SD/HD 500-1000 750

426x240 SD/HD 500-1000 750

416x240 SD/HD 384-800 500

400x304 SD/HD 300-800 500

400x300 SD/HD 300-800 500

400x240 SD/HD 300-800 500

400x224 SD/HD 300-800 500

384x304 SD/HD 300-800 500

384x288 SD/HD 300-800 500

384x216 SD/HD 90-800 500

378x288 SD/HD 90-800 500

352x576 SD/HD 90-800 500

352x480 SD/HD 90-800 500

352x288 SD/HD 90-800 500

352x240 SD/HD 90-800 500

336x192 SD/HD 90-800 500

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 149 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

Table 6-5: Sub-SD Output Specifications

Default
Input Bitrate
Resolution Bitrate
Format (kbps)
(kbps)

320x240 SD/HD 90-800 450

320x180 SD/HD 90-800 450

320x128 SD/HD 90-800 450

304x240 SD/HD 90-800 450

304x224 SD/HD 90-800 450

288x162 SD/HD 90-800 350

256x192 SD/HD 90-800 350

256x144 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x240 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x192 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x180 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x176 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x160 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x136 SD/HD 90-800 350

230x180 SD/HD 90-800 350

224x128 SD/HD 90-800 350

216x120 SD/HD 90-800 350

192x192 SD/HD 90-800 350

192x144 SD/HD 90-800 350

176x144 SD/HD 90-800 350

160x120 SD/HD 90-800 350

128x96 SD/HD 90-800 350

128x80 SD/HD 90-800 350

6.2 Processing Multiscreen Streams

6.2.1 Overview
The multiscreen streams outflow the device in MBTSs. Each MBTS includes up to 12 SPTSs, or
profiles. The provisioning includes the following stages:
 Defining the required device frequency. See Setting Device Frequency on page 152
 Selecting the required input service and output port
 Input service - the service flows into the device over a GbE port

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 150 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

 Output Port - multiscreen services outflow over a GbE port. You need to define a
multicast IP to outflow the MBTS.
See Transcoding Multiscreen Streams on page 152.
 Configuring the multiscreen parameters - Configuration is done using the Multi Bitrate
Transport Stream page as explained in Transcoding Multiscreen Streams on page 152.

Configuration includes:
 Setting unique stream parameters as explained in the following instructions.
 Setting parameters common to all streams in an MBTS as explained in the following
instructions.

NOTE: Once you configure a transcoded video stream as an multiscreen stream, you cannot configure
the video stream via the Video Transcoding tab. 
You can configure the transcoded audio stream via the Audio Transcoding tab and all changes apply to all
audio streams in a profile.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 151 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

6.2.2 Setting Device Frequency

1. Log into the device
2. Select Tools > A/V Processing tab.

Focus on the ACE Video

Configuration section

3. Focus on the ACE Video Configuration section, Video Frequency option.

4. Open the Video Frequency list and select either 50 or 60 Hz.

6.2.3 Transcoding Multiscreen Streams

1. Log into the device.
2. In the Input section, select the required service. The service can inflow over a GbE port.
3. In the Output section, select the required GbE port. The multiscreen streams can outflow
over a GbE port only.

Select the input service, New MBTS button Select the GbE output port,
step 2 in above instructions step 3 in above instructions

4. Click New MBTS .

NOTE: A click on New MBTS/Edit MBTS opens the Multi Bitrate Transport Stream page when the
required input and output components are selected as explained in step 2 &3.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 152 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

The Multi Bitrate Transport Stream page opens:

IP Properties section

Input Properties
section

Multiscreen Profiles
section

Available Stream
section

Common Video
Properties section

5. To define the output, focus on IP Properties section and do the following:

a. In Destination IP Address, enter a multicast IP address to outflow the MBTS. This

multicast IP address with a UDP port specific for each multiscreen profile, define the
SPTS included in the MBTS. For UDP definition, see step 7.2.
b. In PMT PID, enter the PMT PID of all programs included in the profile.
6. Output bitrate ranges and resolution depend on the input video format. Prior to the profile
configuration, you should define the input video format. To define the input video format,
focus on the Input Properties section. Open the Input Video Format list and select either HD
or SD.
Open the Input Video
Format list and select HD
or SD

The New button is enabled and the Multiscreen Profiles section is updated according to the
selected input video format. Once you select an input, the Select Input option is removed.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 153 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

7. To define a profile, focus on the Multiscreen Profiles section and do the following:

a. To create a multiscreen profile click New. A blank record appears and you can define
the profile parameters.
b. Under Port, define the output UDP port of the profile.
c. Under Video Bitrate, enter the required bitrate fro the available range.
For HD, see Table 6-3 on page 147
For SD, see Table 6-4 on page 148
For Sub SD, see Table 6-5 on page 149
d. Reserved Bitrate - The total bitrate required for all passthrough audio/data PIDs that are
attributed to this MBTS profile. In case you changed passthrough PIDs configuration,
enter under Reserved Bitrate, the appropriate bitrate following your changes to
passthrough data/audio PIDs. Reserved Bitrate is automatically calculated, but you
can configure it in case passthrough PIDs configurations is changed and it is required
to re-set the total bitrate of the passthorugh PIDs within the output TS. Automatic
Calculation of Reserved bitrate is as follows: 
In CBR Mode - Video Bitrate + Transcoded Audios (TS) Bitrate + PSI + Reserved
Bitrate (for all passthrough streams)
In ABR Mode - (Video Bitrate)*4 + Transcoded Audios (TS) Bitrate + PSI + Reserved
Bitrate (for all passthrough streams)
In case automatic calculation adds high overhead of Null packets to the output TS,
you can adjust it by re-setting the Reserved Bitrate.
e. Under Video Resolution, select the required resolution.
For HD, see Table 6-3 on page 147
For SD, see Table 6-4 on page 148
For Sub SD, see Table 6-5 on page 149
f. Under Encoding Profiles, select the required profile. You can select: Baseline, Main or
High.
g. Under Encoding Level, select either automatic, or a level defined by the H.264
specifications:
 Automatic - encoding level is automatically defined according to the frame size,
frame rate and max bit rate.
 Available levels: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 4.0, 4.1. If configurable
level does not comply with the configured frame size, frame rate and bitrate, ACE
accepts the configured level and raises the alarm Encoding level violation.
h. Under Frame Rate, select either of the following:
 29.97 / 25 - applies to Full frame rate, where:
29.97 fps for 60Hz (default)
25 fps for 50Hz (default)
 14.98 / 12.5 - applies to Half frame rate, where: 
14.985 fps for 60Hz (default)
12.5 fps for 50 Hz

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 154 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

i. Under Insert B-Frame, select to insert B-Frames.

8. Each profile may have up to 25 PIDs. Each profile should have a transcoded video
stream, it may have multiple transcoded audio streams and may have data streams. To
define/view the streams, focus on the Available Streams section and do the following:

a. In the Select box:

Video PID - always selected and the box is grayed out.
Audio PID - select/de-select the required audio PID.
Data PID - select/de-select the required data PID. If selected, it is always
passthrough.
b. Under Stream, view the stream type, whether video, audio or data.
c. Under Input PID, view the input PID.
d. Under Output PID, enter the required output PID.
e. Under Input Codec, view the codec of the input video/audio PID.
f. Under Output Codec, view the output codec of the video stream. The output codec
video stream is H.264 only. The output audio codec is AAC unless you wish to
passthrough the audio stream. In this case the output codec is as in the input.
g. Under Bitrate, open the bitrate list and select the required bitrate.
h. To transmit the stream with no changes, tick Passthrough.
i. To duplicate the stream, see Duplicating Audio/Data Streams on page 157.
9. To define the parameters common to all multiscreen streams, focus on the Common
Properties section and do the following:

a. In Output Codec, view the output codec. The output codec is H.264.
b. Open the Bitrate Mode list and select either of the following:
 CBR - Constant Bitrate
 ABR - Average Bitrate
c. Aspect Ratio - allows to match picture to type of screen, standard or wide screen. To
configure aspect ratio, open the Aspect Ratio list and select one of the following:
Follow the Input
4:3 
16:9

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 155 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

NOTE: To form a 16:9 image in case the input aspect ratio is 4:3, the input image is rescaled with black
pixel columns added to the left and right sides of the rescaled image (i.e. pillar-boxing).

d. In IDR Interval (sec), enter the required interval between the IDR frames.
e. Open the Configure Bitrate list and select either of the following:
 TS Level - the baseline for calculating the output transport stream bitrate includes
the ES bitrate and the TS header encapsulation overhead
 ES Level - the baseline for calculating the output transport stream bitrate includes
only the ES bitrate
f. Open the Closed Caption list and select either of the following:
 ATSC A/72
 Discard

NOTE: : Closed caption/V-Chip information is passed through only for full frame rate profiles (29.97fps),
due to standards restriction.

g. MCTF (Motion-Compensated Temporal Filtering) - by default it is off. Mctf affects the

video quality and reduces noises. If the service bit rate is low it is recommended to
use strong Mctf. However, strong Mctf affects the sharpness of the picture. To select
the required Mctf, open the Mctf list and select the required level ranging from very
weak to very strong.
h. EBP (Encoder Boundary Point) - by default it is disabled. EBP is a signaling mechanism
for creating fragments or segments from audio or video streams. It also can provide a
timing field to indicate encoding time that can be used for synchronization purposes.
EBP applies to both Broadcast and Multiscreen modes as the following table shows:


EBP Mode Broadcast Multiscreen

Disabled V V

Every GOP V

Every Segment V

To select the required EBP, open the EBP list and select the following:
In Multiscreen mode - select either Disable or Every Segment.
In Broadcast mode - see Step 17 on pagepage 11.
i. EBP Info - applies to advanced users only. By default this field is enabled only when
Every Segment is selected in EBP. When enabled, enter the required info according to
the explanation in EBP Advanced Configuration on page 21.

NOTE: Changing the configuration of EBP Info is not service affecting.

10. Click Done to save the configuration and to close the dialog.
The New MBTS button toggles to Update MBTS. You can click it and update the
configuration of the profiles.

11. To send to device, click Apply .

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 156 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

The multiscreen transcoding is configured via the Multi Bitrate page only. However, if you
select in the Output section a multiscreen service, the Video Transcoding tab is disabled and
appears as the following picture shows.

6.2.3.1 Duplicating Audio/Data Streams

You can transcode/passthrough each audio/data stream multiple times, with different output
PID and transcoding parameters. You can also configure whether to enable each audio/data
stream per specific MBTS Profile.
Each MBTS may have up to 25 streams.
Duplication of audio/data streams is done across all MBTS profiles. The Duplicate link is
enabled, only once all MBTS profiles are selected as the following pictures show:

Some MBTS profiles are

selected

Duplication of stream is
disabled

All MBTS profiles are

selected

Duplication of stream is
enabled

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 157 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

 To duplicate
1. Select all configured profiles. Focus on the Multiscreen Profiles section and select all
profiles by ticking the # box, or by ticking the number box next to each profile.

Click here to select all profiles, or click

next to each profile

2. Click on the Duplicate link, to duplicate an audio or data stream. Once you have
duplicated a stream, you can either duplicate it or remove it.
3. To associated the streams with a profile, select the required profile/profiles. By default,
stream are associated to all profiles. To select the required profile, do either of the
following:
2. In the Multiscreen Profiles, select the required profile/profiles, or
3. In the Multiscreen Profiles, open the Available Streams For list and select the required
stream.

6.2.3.2 Editing the Multiscreen Profiles List

To delete multiscreen profiles, do the following:

NOTE: Removing/adding multiscreen stream from a profile is service affecting for all streams in the
profile.

1. Log into the device.

2. In the Output section, drill down to the required MBTS service.

3. Click Update MBTS.

4. In the Multiscreen Transport Stream page, focus on the Multiscreen Profiles section.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 158 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

5. Select the required profile to be removed. The Delete button is enabled.

The profile to be Delete button is

removed is selected enabled

6. Click Delete. The selected profile is removed from the MBTS.

NOTE: If you remove all profiles from an MBTS, the MBTS is deleted as well.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 159 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 7
Splicing

7.1 Splicing Overview

Digital Programming Insertion (DPI) or Splicing is the process in which the main feed is
spliced to allow the insertion of another stream, usually an ad. The transition from the main
feed to the inserted stream and vise versa should be seamless, frame-accurate splice, to
allow a flawless broadcast.
Splicing configuration includes the following stages:

7.2 DPI Terminology

Network feed - another name for the main feed, that is the feed to be spliced.
Avail - time slots for inserting content into the network feed. The avails are transmitted over a
SCTE35 PID.
Cue message - sent from the Splicer to the Ad server. The cue message informs the Ad
server of an avail to allow the Ad server to retrieve the ad spots scheduled for that avail.
Insertion channel - the channel over which the Ad server streams the ads to the Splicer. The
Insertion channel interface is either IP or ASI.
Splice In Point and Splice Out Point - Splice In Point indicates the frame for inserting content
into the network feed. Splice Out Point indicates the frame for ending the insertion and
returning to the network feed.

Splice in point Splice out point

Ad - a short commercial clip, typically 30 seconds long.

Back-to-Back Insertion (B2B) - when more than one ad is inserted, the ads are inserted one
following the other without returning to the network feed.

7.3 DPI Standards

A splicing standard-based solution supports the following standards:
SCTE35 - Digital Program Insertion Cueing Message for Cable protocol. A protocol for in
band cue messages that defines the potential splice time-slots (avails) in the stream.
SCTE30 – Digital Program Insertion Splicing API. A communication protocol between Ad
Servers and Splicers, to communicate splice messages.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 160 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 7 Splicing Components of the Splicing Solution

7.4 Components of the Splicing Solution

The following illustrations show the main components of the discussed Splicing solution:

7.4.1 Ad Server
The Ad server does the following:
 Manages the splicing - the Ad server initiates the splicing and it defines when to splice,
what to insert and for how long. To control the splicing it communicates with the Splicer
over the SCTE30 protocol.
 Controls the Insertion channel - the Ad server contains all the insertion content and
streams the ads as required over the Insertion channel to the Splicer. The Insertion
channel interface is either IP or ASI as the above illustrations show.
 Interfaces with an NTP server - Both Ad server and Splicer interface with the same NTP
server. The Ad server receives time signals from the NTP server and synchronizes its
internal clock with the external NTP clock. This clock is also utilized by the Splicer. Both
the Splicer and Ad server share a common time-base to ensure maximum
synchronization between them.

7.4.2 Digital Splicer

ProStream 9000, the digital Splicer in this solution, allows a smooth and seamless transition
from one stream to another. The Splicer performs the following:
 Receives main feed - the Splicer receives the main feed with SCTE35 data over its IP
interface.
 Encapsulates SCTE35 data - the Splicer encapsulates SCTE35 data as SCTE30 Cue
messages. The Splicer sends these messages to the Ad server to inform it of an avail and
to allow the Ad server to initiate a splice.
 Receives Splice requests and insertion content - The Splicer receives from the Ad server
a splice request and the insertion content and executes a splice at the required time.
 NTP Interface - allows the Splicer to receive a time signal from the system NTP server and
to synchronize its clock according to the NTP time.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 161 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 7 Splicing Specifications

7.5 Specifications
7.5.1 Splicing Specifications
The following table lists splicing specifications supported by ProStream 9000 Splicer:

Table 7-1: Splicing Specifications

Item Specification

Video Format H264/MPEG2/SD/HD, 50/60 Hz

Audio type Supports all types

Spliceable services Up to 70 spliceable service per device

Network feed interface IP

Insertion Channel Interface IP

Spliceable service type Flows through the platform over IP, IP in and IP out.

Spliceable service content 1 video PID

Up to 8 Audio PIDs
Up to 4 data PIDs

Supported protocols Standard-based SCTE30, SCTE35 and SCTE104

Ad Specifications CBR, 0.5-8mbps

7.5.2 Ad Server Specifications

ProStream 9000 is a SCTE35/30 compliant Splicer. It is integrated with Harmonic Vigor Ad
Server. Following are the specifications of these Ad servers

Table 7-2: Vigor Specification

Item Specification

Insertion channel IP

Splice request mode PIDs mode

Splicing request initiation Based on an external system

7.6 Configuring the Splicer

7.6.1 Defining Splicer-Ad Server Communication Parameters
To allow the Splicer and Ad server to communicate, you should define the following
parameters. The value of these parameters should be identical for both the Splicer and Ad
server. The following instructions guide you on how to configure the Splicer via the web
client. For Ad server configuration, see Ad server documentation.
 Splicer name - a unique name of the Splicer. See Defining the Splicer Name on
page 163.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 162 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 7 Splicing Configuring the Splicer

 Splicer IP address and SCTE30 port - The default SCTE30 port is 5168. See Defining the
SCTE30 Port and Allocating Resources on page 164.
 Services - enter a name for each spliceable service. See Configuring Spliceable Services
on page 164.
 Insertion Channel - In the Splicer, verify that the input port over which the Splicer receives
the Ad insertion, is enabled. In the Ad server configuration, verify that the port settings
match this port.
 NTP Server - enter the IP address of the NTP server and verify that NTP communication is
enabled. See Synchronizing Splicer Time on page 164.
 Maximum Spliceable Services - allocate resources for spliceable services. This parameter
is relevant to the Splicer only. See Defining the Splicer Name on page 163.
Once the Ad server is up and running it sends an Initiation request for each spliceable
service. If the configuration is valid, the Splicer sends a positive Initiation response and the Ad
server and Splicer communicate.

7.7 Configuring the Splicer

7.7.1 Defining the Splicer Name
1. Open a browser and type the IP address of the device.
2. Login to the device.
3. Select Platform tab > Chassis/Main Card.

Enter the Splicer name

4. Under Chassis Properties, in Unit name, enter the name of the Splicer. When configuring
the Ad server, use this name as the Splicer name.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 163 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 7 Splicing Configuring the Splicer

7.7.2 Defining the SCTE30 Port and Allocating Resources

1. Select Tools > DPI tab.

2. In STCE30 Port, enter the port number via which the Ad server manages the splicer. The
default is 5168.
3. Total Splice Engines is not applicable for ProStream 9000.
4. In GbE Preroll Compensation (ms), enter the required compensation of the GbE insertion
channel.
5. Open the Compliant Mode and select either of the following:
 SCTE30
 C-COR
6. Click Apply.

7.7.3 Synchronizing Splicer Time

See Network Time Protocol (NTP) on page 211.

7.7.4 Configuring Spliceable Services

To splice a service, configure it as a spliceable service. Spliceable services should flow into
the device and out of the device via a GbE port of the GbE 4G IOM module.
1. In the web client, in Output, select the required service.
2. Select the Main tab.

Enter service name

Select to enable
splicing

3. In Name, enter the service name. This service name is identical to the service name
defined in the Ad server.
4. To turn a service into a spliceable service, select Enable Splicing.
5. Click Apply.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 164 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 7 Splicing Configuring the Splicer

7.7.5 Configuring Data PIDs

1. In the web client, in Output, select the required service.
2. Select the data PIDs of the service.
3. Select the Advanced tab:

Open the PID Matching for Splice list

4. To coordinate between network PIDs and Ad server PIDs, open the PID Matching for Splice
list and select one of the following options:
 Match Ad (Fallback: Block Service PID During Ad) - Try to match Ad PID to network
PID. If a matching PID is not found, always block the network PID.
 Match Ad (Fallback: Play Service PID During Ad) - Try to match Ad PID to network
PID. If a matching PID is not found, always play the network PID.
 Play Service PID During Ad - Do not try to match Ad PID to network PID, always play
the network PID
 Block Service PID During Ad - Do not try to match Ad PID to network PID, always
block the network PID
5. Click Apply.

7.7.6 Configuring SCTE35 PID

In case of an SCTE35 PID, you can either block or pass the SCTE35 PID:
 Block - do not allow the SCTE35 PID to flow
 Pass - allow the SCTE35 PID to flow
1. In the web client, in Output, select the required service.
2. Select the SCTE35 PID of the service.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 165 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 7 Splicing Configuring the Splicer

3. Select the Advanced tab:

Select here

4. To control the flow of the SCTE35 PID, do the following:

 To block SCTE35 PID, select Do Not Flow
 To pass SCTE35 PID, verify the option Do Not Flow is not selected.
 Match Ad (Fallback: Play Service PID During Ad) - Try to match Ad PID to network
PID. If a matching PID is not found, always play the network PID.
 Play Service PID During Ad - Do not try to match Ad PID to network PID, always play
the network PID
 Block Service PID During Ad - Do not try to match Ad PID to network PID, always
block the network PID
5. Click Apply.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 166 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 8
CAS

8.1 CAS Overview

The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by
scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key.
ProStream 9000 devices support the following CAS mode:
 DVB CSR scrambling - ProStream 9000 may be used as a DVB-CSA scrambler, over its
ASI and GbE interfaces. ProStream 9000 is fully-integrated and certified to work with the
following CA Systems:
 NagraVision
 NDS
 Irdeto
 Viaccess
 Conax
When working as a scrambler, the following options apply:
 DVB encryption with external or internal EIS. See Using Internal EIS on page 175.
 BISS - See BISS Overview on page 178.

8.2 Setting General CAS Parameters

To set general CAS parameters, do the following:
 Set communication parameters between ProStream and EIS.
 Set the Crypto Period Duration.
 Set communication parameters between ProStream and ECMG.
 Allocate ECM PIDs.
 Set communication parameters between ProStream and EMMG.
 Allocate EMM PIDs.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 167 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

8.2.1 Main CAS Page

The Main CAS page allows to set the CAS parameters. It allows to configure the EIS and
ProStream communication and the ECMG and ProStream communication.
 To open the Main CAS page
 In the web page, select the CAS tab.

8.2.1.1 Setting CAS parameters

1. In EIS Port Number box, type the required value to set the TCP port through which
ProStream communicates with the EIS. Valid values range between 1024 and 65535.
The default value is 11000.

NOTE: ProStream 9000 is a server to the EIS device.

2. In the CP Duration (Sec) box, type the required value to set how often ProStream should
change the encryption word, key. The Crypto Period is indicated in seconds and the valid
range 5 - 7200.
3. In the Channel Test Tolerance box, type in the required value to define the allowed channel-
tests before closing the connection with the ECMG. The default value is 3.
4. In CAS Mode, select one of the following options:
 DVB - default option. CAS that supports the DVB protocol
 AES CBC - CAS that supports the Advance Encryption Standard (AES) CBC protocol.
For future use only.
5. Select CW Conformance to allow CW conformance. For future use only.
6. CW Synchronization - applies to NMX control mode. When checked, there is CW
synchronization between the primary and backup device. For future use only.
7. In State, select one of the following:
 Init - applies to NMX control mode only.
 Primary - this device functions as the primary device for CAS purposes
 Backup - this device functions as the backup device for CAS purposes
 Standalone - this device works in a standalone mode

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 168 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

8. In Colleague IP Address, enter the IP address of the backup CAS device.

9. In Selective Encryption, verify that the box is not selected. When selected, it allows trick
mode of scrambled content. This option supports live ingests of channels such as nPVR,
CathcUp TV and StartOver.
10. Number of Unencrypted Packets - enabled once you select Selective Encryption. Open the list
and select the number of clear packets.
11. In EIS Data, enter the IP address and subnet mask of EIS1 and EIS2 as explained below:

 In IP Address, enter the IP address of EIS1 and EIS2.

 In Subnet Mask, enter the subnet mask of EIS1 and EIS2, respectively, to enable
communication when the EIS is hooked to a network other than the CAS or the
management network.

8.2.1.2 Viewing Communication Parameters between Primary and Backup

The primary and backup scramblers communicate via TCP. To view the communication
parameters, focus on the Primary Backup Synchronization section.

The following table lists the parameters and explains them:

Table 8-1: TCP Communication

Parameter Explanation

Module Usually SCG appears to indicate that the ECM and CW are
synchronized

Protocol TCP, the communication protocol between the scramblers

Local IP Address The IP address of the primary device over which it

communicates with the backup device

Local Port The port of the primary device over which it communicates with
the backup device

Colleague IP Address The IP address of the backup device over which it

communicates with the primary device

Colleague Port The port number of the backup device over which it
communicates with the primary device

State As per the Net Stat values

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 169 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

8.2.1.3 Setting Communication Parameters Between ProStream and ECMG

1. Select Simulcrypt Protocols > ECMG tab.

2. Click Add ECMG, to add an ECMG.

You may add up to 30 ECMGs.
3. Configure the ECMG according to the following parameters:
 Name - type in a name for the ECMG.
 Priority - to allow redundancy, set priority by indicating the primary and secondary ECMG
of the same SuperCAS ID.The ProStream always tries to connect first to the ECMG with
the same SuperCAS ID and the highest priority and then to the next highest priority.
Assign priority from 1-10 with 1 as the highest priority.
 SuperCasID (hex) - a 32-bit identifier of the EIS provided by the CAS vendor.
 Protocol Revision - specify the mode of operation of the ECMG. Select revision 1, 2 or 3.
 IP Address - set the IP address of the ECMG. This IP address should be of the same
subnet as the ETH2 IP address.
 Subnet Mask - set subnet mask for the ECMG. In case ECMG resides in a subnet other
than the management or CAS subnets, set ECMG Subnet Mask to allow communication.
 Port - set in decimal, the number of the ECMG TCP port used to connect the ECMG to the
ProStream. The CAS vendor provides this value.
 Channel ID - set a unique number to define a unique ECMG.
 Ext. CW - when selected, an external CW is used. Select this option in case the ECMG
generates a CW.
 Status - a read only filed which indicates the state of the connection. The connection state
is either of the following:
 Connected - ECMG and ProStream are communicating.
 Disconnected - no connection is taking place at the moment.

TIP: Once you have set the CAS configuration and send configuration to the device, allocate the ECM PID.

 Open Streams - the number of streams that are open for the ECMG.

8.2.1.4 Allocating ECM PIDs

When allocating ECM PIDs you actually define PIDs as ECM PIDs. This procedure is
performed via the Stream Config page using the New ECM and New EMM buttons.
 To allocate ECM PIDs
1. Open the Stream Config page. (You may read/refresh input.)
2. Select the TS you wish to encrypt.
3. Select the PID Allocation icon.
The New ECM or New EMM buttons appear.
4. Click New ECM, to create an ECM PID.
An ECM PID appears with default ID, SuperCasID and PID number.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 170 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

5. Select the new ECM PID to allocate it.

The Delete button appears beneath the New EMM button and the Main tab is updated as
the following figure shows:

6. To allocate the ECM PID, fill in the following fields:

 ECM ID - type in the ECM ID as provided by your CAS vendor. The ECM ID is a
unique headend ID.
 SuperCasID - a 32-bit identifier that contains the CAS ID and ECMG ID. The CAS
vendor provides this value.
 PID - type in the PID number you allocate for the ECM, in other words the PID that
carries the ECM.
 Private Data - a string of up to 100 bytes that is added to the CA descriptor.
 PID Priority - define the priority of the ECM PID in case of overflow. Priority values
range from High to Low.
 Manage TID Independently - when selected, ProStream 9000 manages the ECM
table ID independent of the CP (Control Period).

NOTE: A CA descriptor is automatically added.

8.2.2 Setting EMMG Parameters

The Entitlement Management Message Generator issues EMMs (Entitlement Management
Messages) that carry private Control Access (CA) information as access permits to specific
users, access revocations etc. When configuring the EMMG, you set communication
parameters to establish communication between the ProStream and the EMMG. The
configuration is done via the EMMG page.

8.2.2.1 Configuring EMMG

You can add up to 30 EMMGs.
1. Select Simulcrypt Protocols tab > EMMG.

Define up to
5 different
ports

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 171 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

2. To add an EMMG, click Add EMMG. You can add up to 20 EMMGs.

3. Add a row to the table for each EMMG that you want to configure. You can add up to ten
EMMGs.
4. Configure the EMMG by filling in the EMMG table:
 Del EMMG - check the box of the EMMG you wish to delete.
 ProStream Port - enter the TCP port via which the ProStream communicates with the
EMMG. ProStream supports up to five ports.
 Client ID (hex) - enter in hex. an identifier of the EMMG. The EMMG vendor provides
this number.
 IP Address - type in the IP address of the EMMG.
 Subnet Mask - type in the subnet mask of the EMMG to enable communication when
the EMMG is hooked to a subnet other than the management or CAS subnets.
 Control - specify whether the connection is TCP or broadcast. If you select broadcast,
the Sect TS Packet field is enabled and you should select the required option.
 Sect TS Packet - enabled only if you select Broadcast under Control. The Sect TS
Packet field defines the format of the EMM. The available formats are as follows:
Section - the EMM is in MPEG-2 section format.
Packet - the EMM is in MPEG-2 transport stream packet format.
 Data ID - enabled only if you select Broadcast under Control. Type in the data source
identifier.
 Data Format - enabled only if you select Broadcast under Control. Allows to select
either EMM or PDG data format.

TIP: Once you have configured the EMMG parameters, allocate EMM PIDs for the required TSs.

8.2.2.2 Allocating EMM PIDs

When allocating EMM PIDs you actually define PIDs as EMM PIDs. This procedure is
performed via the Stream Config screen and you can add an EMM in either of the following
options:
 Under PID Allocation
 Moving a PID from the input to the output
 To allocate EMM PIDs under PID allocation
1. Select the Stream Config tab. (You may read/refresh input.)
2. Select the TS you wish to encrypt.
3. Select the PID Allocation icon.
The New ECM and New EMM buttons appear.
4. Click New EMM, to create an EMM PID.
An EMM PID appears with default ID, Client ID and default PID number.
5. Select the new EMM PID to allocate it.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 172 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

The Delete button appears beneath the New EMM button and the Main tab is updated as
the following figure shows:

6. To allocate the EMM PID, fill in the following fields:

 EMM ID - type in the EMM ID as provided by your CAS vendor. The EMM ID is a
unique headend ID.
 Client ID- a four-byte integer that contains the CAS ID and EMMG identifier. The CAS
vendor provides this value.
 Backup Client ID -
 PID - type in the PID number you allocate for the EMM, in other words the PID that
carries the EMM.
 Max Bitrate - type in the maximum bitrate of the EMM.
 Private Data - a string of up to 100 bytes that is added to the CA descriptor.
To stop sending EMM with the output stream, delete the EMM PID via the Stream Config
page. Deleting EMMGs only (via the EMMG page) does not stop the EMMs from flowing with
the output stream.
 To allocate EMM PIDs using an input PID
1. Select the Stream Config tab. (You may read/refresh input.)
2. Select the TS you wish to encrypt.
3. In Input, select the required PID and click Add to Output.
The PID appears underneath the selected output TS.
4. Click the newly moved PID.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 173 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS What’s Next...

The Main tab is updates accordingly:

5. To allocate the EMM PID, fill in the following fields:

 EMM PID - tick to allocate the PID for the EMM, in other words the PID that carries
the EMM.
 CAS ID- a four-byte integer that contains the CAS ID and EMMG identifier. The CAS
vendor provides this value.
 Private Data - a string of up to 100 bytes that is automatically added to the CA
descriptor in the CAT table. To create CAT, see Provisioning the Output TS on
page 66.
To stop sending EMM with the output stream, delete the EMM PID via the Stream Config
page. Deleting EMMGs only (via the EMMG page) does not stop the EMMs from flowing with
the output stream.

8.3 What’s Next...

To start scrambling, activate your EIS to start issuing SCGs. If you do not have a vendor’s EIS
integrated in your CAS, you may use the Internal EIS.

8.4 Internal EIS

ProStream 9000 is furnished with internal EIS and you can create, configure and send SCGs
to scramble the required service or PID. ProStream 9000 allows to provision up to 200 SCGs.
An SCG request applies to a service or a PID and each SCG should be unique. The following
table lists the required combined parameters for creating a unique SCG:

Table 8-2:

Data Type SCG Components Comments

Service NID, TSID, SID, ECM ID A single SCG may supports multiple TSs, see
Step 6 on page page 176.
PID NID, TSIN, PID, ECM ID

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 174 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Internal EIS

8.4.1 Using Internal EIS

The following section instructs you on how to do the following:
 Define SCG components
 Associate an ECM with the SCG
 Send a provision

1. Select Simulcrypt Protocols > Internal EIS tab.

2. Click Create New SCG.

The New SCG page appears.
click to send Click to cancel
provision provision

Define SCG
components

Displays SCG
components

Displays available
ECMs

Displays parameters
of selected ECM

3. In SCG ID, define the required SCG ID.

4. Open the Component list and select either of the following:
Service List - the SCG refers to a service and once a TS is selected the Component
section is populated with the services of the TS.
PID List - the SCG refers to a PID and once a TS is selected the Component section is
populated with the PIDs of the TS.
5. To select a TS, open the TS ID list and select the required TS.
The Components and the ECM Groups sections are populated with the available
services/PIDs and the allocated ECMs.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 175 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Internal EIS

6. To select multiple TSs, select Multiple TS. In this case the services/PIDs of the output TSs
with the selected ID, regardless of their NID (Network ID) appear in the Component List.
For example, if the selected TS ID = 1 and Multiple TS is selected, all the services of all
output TS with ID 1 appear in the Component list, as the following picture shows:

TS ID 1 is
selected
Multiple TS is
selected
All services of
output TS with ID
1 appear
regardless of the
NID

7. In Components, select the required service(s)/PID(s) to be scrambled.

To select multiple components, press <Ctrl> while dragging/clicking your mouse.
8. To associate an ECM, in ECM Groups, select an ECM.
9. Click Add.

NOTE: You can add up to 30 ECMs per SCG.

A table appears and you can define the Access Criteria.

Enter Access Criteria

TIP: You can delete an associated ECM by clicking, in the table, the required ECM and pressing the
<Delete> key.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 176 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Internal EIS

10. To send the SCG, click Send Provision.

11. In the confirmation message, click OK.The SCG Parameters page closes and Internal EIS
page displays the provisioned SCG:

Details of provisioned SCG

8.4.1.1 TIPs for SCG Table

The SCG table displays details of the sent SCGs:
 SCGID
 Network ID - if Multiple TS in selected Network ID is 0.
 TS ID
 Components - the components to be scrambled, either service(s) or PIDs
 List - shows the ID of the service(s)/PIDs to be scrambled by this SCG request.
 Number of ECM Groups - the number of associated ECM groups.
 To create a new SCG
 Do one of the following:
 Click Create New SCG.
Or
 Click any where in the Internal EIS page and press the <Insert> key.
The SCG Parameters page appears.
 To edit an SCG
 Do one of the following:
 Click Edit SCG.
Or
 Double click the required SCG.
The SCG Parameters page appears.
 To delete an SCG
NOTE: When you delete an SCG the service/PID turns to clear.

 Do one of the following procedures:

12. Select the SCG(s) to be deleted.
1. Click Delete SCG(s).
1. In the confirmation message, click OK.
Or
2. Select the SCG(s) to be deleted.
1. Press the <Delete> key.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 177 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS BISS Overview

1. Click OK in the confirmation message.

8.5 BISS Overview

Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS) is an open Standard for protecting digital
contribution applications.
Digital contribution applications require the direct entry of a Session Word (SW) at the
transmitter and receiver. The sender and receiver(s) of the transmission share the SW, and
thus only the intended users receive the transmission. The Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD)
device can decode the content only if the SW is the same and complies with the BISS
standard.
BISS supports the following modes of work:
 Mode 0 - no scrambling
 Mode 1 - transmission is scrambled and a fixed clear SW is required for decoding.
 Mode E - transmission is scrambled and a fixed encrypted SW is required for decoding.

8.5.1 BISS Specifications

Table 8-3: BISS Specifications

Specification Explanation

ProStream 9000 In standalone mode only

Supported BISS mode BISS Mode 1

Note: BISS-E mode is currently unsupported.

Supported Interfaces Output ASI and GbE ports

Scrambling component  Service level only

 All ES components unless Always Clear is
configured. See Applying BISS with Clear PID(s) on
page 179.

IRD PVR-2900

NOTE: ProStream 9000 does not decode the transmitted streams. Decoding is performed by the specified
IRD.

8.5.2 Configuring BISS

NOTE: BISS is applied on a service level only.

1. Open the web client of the device.

2. Select the Symulcrypt Protocols tab.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 178 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS BISS Overview

CAS Mode is DVB

3. Verify that in CAS mode DVB is selected.

1. In output, select the required service.
2. Select the SCR tab.

3. Tick Enable BISS.

The Control Word box is enabled.
4. Enter the required Control Word with up to 12 hexadecimal characters (six bytes). The CW
is required for decoding the scrambled transmission.
5. Click Done.

8.5.2.1 Applying BISS with Clear PID(s)

You can apply BISS with clear PIDs, as explained below:
1. Select the Stream Config tab.
2. In Output, select the required PID.
3. Click Advanced Options.

Open the Scrambling

Override list

4. Open the Scrambling Override list and select the required option:
 Per Service/Transport No Override - follows the scrambling configuration of the TS or
service
 Always Scramble - even if TS or service are not scrambled, the PID is scrambled as
long as a fixed key or a CW is provided
 Always Clear- even if TS or service are scrambled, the PID is always clear.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 179 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Viewing SCGs

8.5.2.2 CA
According to the BISS standard a CA descriptor must be present in the PMT to support BISS.
ProStream 9000 automatically adds a CA descriptor when BISS is enabled. You can add
more descriptors if required.

8.5.2.3 CAT
Verify that the Conditional Access Table (CAT) is enabled when BISS is enabled.
 To enable CAT:
1. Select the required output TS.
2. Select the Tables tab.
3. Tick CAT.

Select the required TS

Select CAT

8.6 Viewing SCGs

1. Select Simulcrypt > SCGs tab.

2. View the following parameters:

 SCG ID - a unique identifier of the SCG
 CP Number - a running counter of the number of Crypto Periods. It indicates the
number of times the ECM has been changed for this stream.
 Time to Next CP - indicates how often the ECM is changing for this stream.
 TS ID - the stream that carries the service to be encrypted as sent by the EIS.
 Service - the ID of the program/service being scrambled using the specific SCG
 PIDs - if PIDs are scrambled, indicates the scrambled PIDs
 Activation Time - the activation time of this configuration
 # ECMs - the number of associated ECMs

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 180 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 8 CAS Using a PSIG Device

 EIS - whether internal or not

 Configuration Match - whether the SCG and ECM configuration is identical to the
ECM PID allocation.
 State - whether scrambling is successful or not.

8.7 Using a PSIG Device

When using a Program Specific Information Generator (PSIG) device, use the PSIG page. The
PSIG interfaces with the ProStream device to receive information required for building the PSI
tables and for injecting them to the ProStream 9000 device.
 To work with PSIG
1. Select Simulcrypt Protocols > PSIG tab.

2. In Active Network, select Enabled and the required enabled network to communicate with
the PSIG. Select either Management or CAS.
3. In Timeout Tolerance, enter the required retrials for establishing communication with the
PSIG.
4. To add a PSIG, click Add PSIG.
5. Enter the following parameters:
 TCP Port - enter the TCP port number over which the ProStream device
communicates with the PSIG.
 Channel Test Interval (msec) - enter the required testing interval.
 IP Address - enter the IP address of the PSIG.
 Subnet Mask - enter the required subnet mask.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 181 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 9
Monitoring
In the event of a malfunction, the following events take place:

Table 9-1: Malfunction Reaction

Object Reaction

Front panel The alarm LED is illuminated in red.

Web client The alarm icon turns red.

The number of active alarms is updated.
a message appears notifying you of the nature of the problem.

9.1 Viewing Alarms

You may view the alarms via the Status page. This page also allows you to view the Alarm log
and to save it as an .XML file.
 To view alarms
1. Perform either of the following:
In the title bar, click the Active Alarms link.
Or
In the web client, select Status.
The Status page appears:

Alarm display

Alarm History

The Status page includes the following two sections:

 Alarms Display
 Alarms History

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 182 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 9 Monitoring Viewing Alarms

9.1.1 Alarms Display

The Alarm display lists the alarms in a chronological order, the first alarm in the list is the
latest alarm to be registered. The Alarm display provides the following information:

Table 9-2: Alarm Display

Parameter Explanation

# a sequential number that indicates the chronological order

according to which the alarms are registered.

Module the faulty object that caused the alarm

Description describes the fault that invoked the alarm

9.1.2 Alarms History

The Alarm History section displays in a chronological order alarms that occurred up to the
time you generated the log. To view an updated log, refresh the log. You may view, refresh,
clear and save the log.
 To view the alarm log
1. In the Status page, click Show History.
In the Alarm History section a log appears and Show History toggles to Refresh History:

2. View the log. It displays the alarms registered up to the time you generated the log and
informs you of the following:

Table 9-3: Alarm History

Parameter Explanation

# index number of the alarm.

Date the date on which the alarm was registered

Time the time on which the alarm was registered

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 183 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 9 Monitoring Viewing Alarms

Table 9-3: Alarm History

Parameter Explanation

Module the faulty component

Description describes the fault that invoked the alarm

Status indicates whether the alarm is on or off

 To refresh the log

Since the Alarm log displays the alarms up to the time you generated the log, refresh it to
view an updated log by performing the following:
 In the Alarm screen, click Refresh History.
The log is updated to display the latest alarms.
 To clear log
1. In the Status page, click Clear History.
The currently displayed log disappears. Once you click Refresh History, a new log is
generated. It includes alarms registered since the last clear log.
 To save log to file
1. In the Alarm screen, click Save to File.
2. Select a location for saving the file and click Save.
The log is saved as an .XML log in the location of your choice.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 184 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 10
Troubleshooting

10.1 Troubleshooting
The table below lists the alarm messages and describes their probable cause and possible
solutions. The alarms are arranged according to the various module and in alphabetical order:
.

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Platform CPC Card HW An essential component of the Power-off the device and Call
Failure card is faulty. Customer Support

CPC Card Temp. The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation of
Sense Exceed the cooling fans.
Limits  Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, call Customer
Support.

CPC Card Inappropriate power supply of Power-off the device and Call
Voltage Error CPC card. Customer Support.

Got New Indicative alarm that appears in N/A

Configuration History log only. Indicates a
change in the configuration.

NTP Connection Connection to NTP failed or lost  Check Ethernet link of Ethernet
Failure port 3.
 Check NTP server definitions.

Front Panel Not Front panel malfunction Call Customer Support

Present

Failure The CWS (Control Word Server) Power down and power up the
Generating CW does not successfully generate CWS
CW.

More Than One More than one NMX is controlling In the web client of the device,
NMX Connected the device. open the Support page, and click
to the Device View Net Stat. Look for TCP
connections port 80 (HTTP) and
try to figure out via IPs which NMX
is yours. If there is an unknown IP,
ask your IT team about it.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 185 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Platforms Platform Change Indicative alarm that the unit N/A

to be Backup configuration has changed and
currently it is configured as a
backup device

Platform Change Indicative alarm that the unit N/A

to be Primary configuration has changed and
currently it is configured as a
primary device

DT Mux Priority Indicative alarm remitted when a N/A

Changed redundancy switch has taken
place. Thus, the DT mux priority
was changed.

Platform Indicative alarm that appears in N/A

Initializing History log only.

Auto-Negotiation The handshake protocol with the Reconfigure the switch to use
Failed: switch failed auto-negotiation settings.
management
network

Auto-Negotiation The handshake protocol with the Reconfigure the switch to use
Failed: CAS switch failed auto-negotiation settings.
network

Could not The device could not reserve Check how many spliceable
Reserve Max maximum splice engines to splice services were configured and
Splice Engines services. remove unnecessary services

Reset Required The required firmware is ready. Reset the device.

after Successful Reset the device to bootup with
DL the new firmware.

Background Background download in progress N/A

Download in
Progress

Background Indicative alarm. Background N/A

Download in Download is in Progress.
Progress - Retry

Background Background download failed due Check that the TFTP server is up
Download Failed to TFTP error. and running. Zap the device.
- TFTP Error

Background Background download failed Remove previous firmware files to

Download Failed because the disk is full. free up space.
- Disk Full

Background Background download failed. Check that the TFTP server is up

Download Failed and running. Zap the device.
- Error

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 186 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Platform Background Background Download was Reboot the device or retry to

Download cancelled download firmware.
Cancelled

Reserved BR in At least one of the DiviTrack pools Contact Harmonic Customer

Safe Mode was configured to enable the Support.
reservation of pool bitrate.
When this is true, the Multiplexer
expects the reserved bitrate client
to communicate with it at least
once every 5 seconds. This term
was not fulfilled, so the actual
reserved bitrate for every
DiviTrack pool will be the
maximum configured bitrate.

License Grace A licensed feature has been used Purchase the license for the
Period Enabled without a license. You have a feature
grace period of 45 days to use this
feature and to purchase a license

License Expired License has reached its expiration Purchase the required license
date.

License General An internal licensing failure is  Restart the device

Failure detected  If problem persists, call
Customer Support.

PSU1 Not Power supply is not mounted in Insert Power supply module in slot
Mounted slot 1 1

PSU2 Not Power supply is not mounted in Insert Power supply module in slot
Mounted slot 2 2

PS1 Not Power supply in slot 1 is  Check power

Operational malfunctioning  Check power cable
 Check power supply unit in slot
1

PS2 Not Power supply in slot 2 is  Check power

Operational malfunctioning  Check power cable
 Check power supply unit in slot
1

IPOL Card Temp. IPOL card is over heating  Check the fans for proper
Sense Exceeds operation
Limits  Check the temp of the
environment temp.

SFC Detection Failed to detect System Fan Replace fan unit

Failed Controller due to:
HW failure of the controller, or
Controller is not installed.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 187 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Platform SFC Cooling A transient error indication. Verify the alarm is remitted. If
Communication persists, replace fan unit.
Failure

Cooling System Detected at least one faulty fan out Replace fan unit
Failure of 6 or x of 8 fans

SFC Ext Temp Internal temperature >= Internal To be defined

Near Threshold temperature threshold

SFC Amb Temp External temperature >= external To be defined

Near Threshold temperature threshold.

Unavailable The internal socket created for the If problem persists, call customer
Internal Socket insertion channel is not allocated. support.

Could not Reduce number of Splice Enabled

reserve max Services
Splice engines

Slot Card Mismatch The detected card is not as Verify that the appropriate card is
configured mounted in the slot.

Card Missing The configured card is not  Verify that the card is mounted
detected in the slot. in the slot
 Verify that card is secured to
the slot.
 If problem persists, replace
card.

ASI Card Sensed Temp. The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation of
Exceeds Limits the cooling fans.
 Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, replace the
IOM card.

ASI Card HW An essential component of the Replace card.

Failure card is faulty.

ASI Card An essential card error. Replace card.

Initializing

ASI Card Voltage Inappropriate power supply of Replace card.

Error GbE card. If more than one card issues the
alarm, call Customer Support.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 188 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

ASI Scr ASI Sensed Temp The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation of
Card Exceeds Limits the cooling fans.
 Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, replace the
IOM card.

ASI Card HW An essential component of the Replace card.

Failure card is faulty.

ASI Card An essential card error. Replace card.

Initializing

ASI Card Voltage Inappropriate power supply of Replace card.

Error GbE card. If more than one card issues the
alarm, call Customer Support.

8VSB Card Meteor Card An essential card error. Replace card.

Initializing

Meteor Card HW An essential component of the Replace card.

Failure card is faulty.

Meteor Sensed The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation of

Temp. Exceeds the cooling fans.
Limits  Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, replace the
card.

Meteor Card Inappropriate power supply of Replace card.

Voltage Error GbE card. If more than one card issues the
alarm, call Customer Support.

ASI Port ASI Input Signal No ASI input flow  Check the ASI source
Loss  Check the ASI input cable and
replace if defective.

ASI Input Sync No valid MPEG data detected on Check the ASI source
Loss the input ASI signal

8VSB Port Meteor No RF input is detected Check RF input

Demodulator
Reset

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 189 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Transcoding Transcoding Card Indicative alarm that appears in N/A

Card Initializing History log only.

Transcoding Card The transcoding card crashed Call Customer Support

Failure resulting from an unknown error.

Transcoding Card The device RAM is less than 1G. Call Customer Support
is Not Supported
by HW Model

Transcoding Card The card is over heating Call Customer Support

Temp. Sense
Exceed Limits

Transcoding Card Inappropriate power supply of Call Customer Support

Voltage Error transcoding card.

Transcoding No The main processing unit cannot Verify that the Transocding card is
Engine Communication communicate with the transcoding securely fastened in its slot
with TransEngine engine If persists, call customer support

TransEngine Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

FPGA Signal Loss

TransEngine Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

FPGA Sync Loss

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 190 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Transcoding TransEngine Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

Engine FPGA Output
Overflow

Loss of Input TS Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

(no nulls)

TransEngine Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

Application Error
(no output)

Host-TransEngine Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

Sync Error (Time
Change)

TS RX Overflow Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

Error

TS TX Underflow Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

Error

Audio DSP - Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support

Communication
Failure

Audio DSP - Core Transcoding engine internal fault Call Customer Support
Failure

Audio DSP - Transcoding engine internal fault Internal problem. If problem

System Failure persists, call Customer Support.

Audio DSP - Not Transcoding engine internal fault Check that configuration meets
enough spec.
resources

License No license for transcoding and Purchase the required license

Transcoding Grace period has expired.
Missing

License PIP No license for PIP and Grace Purchase the required license
Missing period has expired.

License Audio No license for ALM and Grace Purchase the required license
Level Missing period has expired.

Pool License Pool No license for pool and Grace Purchase the required license
Missing period has expired

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 191 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

GbEPro GbE Card Sensed The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation of
Card Temp Exceeds the cooling fans.
Limits  Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, replace the
IOM card.

GbE Card HW An essential component of the Replace card.

Failure card is faulty.

GbE Card An essential card error. Replace card.

Initializing

GbE Card Sensed The card is over heating Replace card.

Temp. Exceeds
Limit

GbE Card Inappropriate power supply of Replace card.

Voltage Error GbE card. If more than one card issues the
alarm, call Customer Support.

GbE Output Too many identical PIDs are Reduce the number of multicast
Multicast Buffer output through the same IOM PIDs.
Overflow card.

GbE Input The input traffic buffer overflowed. Check the input bit rate.
Descrambling
Bitrate Exceeded

GbEPro GbE Card Input An internal data error in the GbE Reassign the GbE IOM.
Data Loss IOM card.

Pacer Clock Error An internal error in the GbE IOM Reassign the GbE IOM.
card.

GbE Flash A notification message during the N/A

Upgrade in upgrade of the GbE IOM firmware.
Process

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 192 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

GbE Port GbE Auto- The handshake protocol with the Check switch.
Negotiation switch failed
Failed

GbE Input Error Input GBE port general failure. 1. Verify that an SFP is installed
in the port.
2. Check the physical
connection between the port
and the switch.
3. Check the validity of the GbE
port configuration and that it
matches the network
definitions.

GbE Input IP At least one IP packet has a CRC Check the switch, fiber, and SFP
Packet CRC Error error connections.

GbE Input IP At least one IP packet is missing Check the switch, fiber, and SFP
Packet Missing connections.

GbE Input Non Management traffic on the GbE Look for sources with excessive
MPEG Buffer network port exceeds the port’s management traffic.
Overflow capacity.

GbE Input Inter The Inter Packet Gap is below 12 Check source.
Packet Gap Too ticks.
Small

GbE Input Invalid The payload length of an input IP/ Check source.
IP/UDP Packet UDP packet is not divisible by 188
Length bytes (standard length of an MPEG
packet)

GbE Link Down - The Gigabit Ethernet port is down. Connect the cable.
Cable
Disconnect

GbE Port Failed The GbE port link is down. Check the link for connectivity.

GbE Output FIFO overrun causes data to be Standalone - reset the module. If it
MPEG Buffer dropped and might cause does not remit the alarm, contact
Overflow decoding problems. Harmonic Customer Support.

GbE SFP Missing The SFP connector is missing from Check that the SFP connector is
the GbE port fully inserted.

GbE Slave In port redundancy, the backup None

Channel port is active
Activated

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 193 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

GbE In GbE Input No data is detected in the backup Verify the socket is correctly
Access Backup Socket input socket defined and is streamed to the
Point Not Active device.

GbE Input No data is detected in the primary Verify the socket is correctly
Primary Socket input socket defined and is streamed to the
Not Active device.

GbE Input Socket Input bit rate exceeds estimated Check source
Buffer Overflow bit rate

Invalid Source Source clock frequency breaches Check source

Clock Frequency the MPEG specifications

GbE Input Socket For more than 100ms, no PCR has Check source
Lost PCR been detected at input socket

GbE Input Socket PCR discontinuity with no Check source

Erred PCR Discontinuity indicator

GbE Input Socket Detects a change in the bit rate of Check source
CBR Rate an MPTS. The MPTS must be a
Changed CBR stream.

GbE Input Socket An MPTS socket is not CBR Check source

Max. Jitter
Exceeded

GbE Input Socket The order of the transport stream In most cases, this is a momentary
Timestamp Error packets inside the IP packet is alarm. If this alarm is not remitted,
wrong. check the network.

Failed to Receive The descrambler does not Check that the CWS is alive and
CW for the successfully receive a CW communication cables are
Service response for the service from the connected.
CWS (Control Word Server).

Invalid Response There are problems in Check that the CWS is alive and
from CWS communication between the communication cables are
descrambler and CWS. connected.

Missing ECM No ECM was extracted from PMT The scrambler does not send ECM
for the scrambled service. to the descrambler. Check
scrambler configuration.

Missing CA There is no CA information for the The CA descriptor is missing.

Information descrambled service. Check the scrambler
configuration.

Undefined There is no AES descriptor in the The descrambler still will try to
Scrambling PMT. descramble the service.
Algorithm The scrambler should add a CAS
Mode descriptor to the PMT.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 194 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

GbE In Unsupported The scrambling descriptor is not In this case, the descrambler will
Access Scrambling AES-NSA. still try to descramble the service.
Point Algorithm The scrambler should add a
scrambling descriptor with an
AES-NSA value to the PMT.

Encoder’s Clock The clock of the encoder is not Check the schedule format against
Not Synced to synchronized with the clock of the the specification.
Mux multiplexer.

GbE Input PAT is missing in the primary Check source

Primary Socket- socket for a longer period than the
PAT Missing configured failover time

GbE Input PAT is missing in the backup Check source

Backup Socket- socket for a longer period than the
PAT Missing configured failover time

Missing PMT

Missing Backup
PMT

GbE Backup With access point/socket level None

Socket Activated redundancy configured, the
primary transport has failed, and
the backup transport is active or
failed.

Queue Depth The allocated buffer reaches the Check bit rate configuration in the
Threshold Passed predefined fullness (50%) input data socket

GbE Input With access point/socket/service- 1. Check the GbE input for link
Primary Socket - level redundancy configured, the and activity.
A/V Missing primary transport failed. 2. Check that the IP and UDP
are indeed flowing to the port.
3. Check that the IP and UDP do
not create a conflict with
other sockets (same 32 lower
bits).

GbE Input With access point/socket/service- 1. Check the GbE input for link
Backup Socket - level redundancy configured, the and activity.
A/V Missing primary transport failed. 2. Check that the IP and UDP
are indeed flowing to the port.
3. Check that the IP and UDP do
not create a conflict with
other sockets (same 32 lower
bits).

DiviTrack Connectivity problem between the Check the connectivity between

Upstream DiviTrack controller and the the device and the encoder.
Problem encoder.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 195 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

GbE In DiviTrack Connectivity problem between the Check the connectivity between
Access Downstream encoder and the DiviTrack the device and the encoder.
Point Problem controller.

GbE Socket With access point/socket/service- 1. Check that the IP and UDP
Failed level redundancy configured, both are indeed flowing to the
the primary and the backup port.
transports have failed. 2. Check that the IP and UDP do
not create a conflict with
other sockets (same 32 lower
bits).

PSIP Tables PSIP Master Guide Table (MGT) Recheck the connection and
Missing was lost. extraction settings.

8VSB In Meteor Weak No RF input is detected Check RF input

Access Signal/Loss of
Point Sync

Meteor Packet Problematic RF signal. Check support Meteor page to get

Error Rate the actual instantaneous packet
Threshold error rate value.
Exceeded

Meteor Signal Problematic RF signal. Check support Meteor page to get

Quality (SNR) the actual signal quality value.
Below Threshold

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 196 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

GbE Out GbE Output Cannot get MAC address of the Check IP connectivity to
Access Socket Not destination in unicast mode. destination.
Point Transmitted

GbE Output Cannot get an updated destination Check IP connectivity to

Socket - MAC address. Output is sent to destination.
Unreachable the last known MAC address. (in
Destination unicast mode)

GbE Output The actual bit rate of the GbE Delete services from the alarmed
Socket - Buffer output socket exceeds the TS until the bit rate stabilizes and
Overflow Level = configured output bit rate the alarm is remitted or redefine
High bit rate for this socket.

GbE Output Because of PID priority, some PIDs Informational only.

Socket - Buffer from Normal priority are dropped.
Overflow Level =
Normal

GbE Output Because of PID priority, some PIDs Informational only

Socket - Buffer from Medium priority are dropped.
Overflow Level =
Medium

GbE Output Because of PID priority, some PIDs Informational only.

Socket - Buffer from Low priority are dropped.
Overflow Level =
Low

Invalid CAS An invalid CAS mode is detected Set the correct CAS mode
Mode

DVB Regen. Not DVB Regenerations Not This HW model does not support
Supported by this Supported this feature.
HW Model

TsIn TsIn CC Error The splicer detected a continuity None

Detected counter error on the transport
stream input.

TsIn MPEG Sync The port has lost sync with the Check source
Loss incoming transport.

Invalid CAS The CAS mode for fixed key Change the CAS mode and reset
mode should be AES_CBC for both the device
descrambler and scrambler

Primary Source The primary source failed and Check source

Failed redundancy switch took place

Backup Source 1 Backup source 1 failed Check source

Failed

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 197 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

TsIn Backup Source 2 Backup source 2 failed Check source

Failed

Backup Source 3 Backup source 3 failed Check source

Failed

Backup Source 4 Backup source 4 failed Check source

Failed

Backup Source 5 Backup source 5 failed Check source

Failed

Primary Source Average bitrate of the primary Check source

PID Underflow source in the pre-defined bitrate
window is under the pre-defined
threshold

Backup Source 1 Average bitrate of the backup Check source

PID Underflow source 2 in the pre-defined bitrate
window is under the pre-defined
threshold

Backup Source 2 Average bitrate of the backup Check source

PID Underflow source 2 in the pre-defined bitrate
window is under the pre-defined
threshold

Backup Source 3 Average bitrate of the backup Check source

PID Underflow source 3 source in the pre-defined
bitrate window is under the pre-
defined threshold

Backup Source 4 Average bitrate of the backup Check source

PID Underflow source 4 in the pre-defined bitrate
window is under the pre-defined
threshold

Backup Source 5 Average bitrate of the backup Check source

PID Underflow source 5 source in the pre-defined
bitrate window is under the pre-
defined threshold

Primary Source PAT is missing in primary Check source

PAT Missing

Backup Source 1 PAT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PAT Missing

Backup Source 2 PAT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PAT Missing

Backup Source 3 PAT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PAT Missing

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 198 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

TsIn Backup Source 4 PAT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PAT Missing

Backup Source 5 PAT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PAT Missing

Primary Source PMT is missing in primary Check source

PMT Missing

Backup Source 1 PAT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PAT Missing

Backup Source 2 PMT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PMT Missing

Backup Source 3 PMT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PMT Missing

Backup Source 4 PMT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PMT Missing

Backup Source 5 PMT is missing in backup source 1 Check source

PMT Missing

Primary Source The number of detected continuity Check source

CC Errors counter errors in a pre-configured
Detected time exceeds the pre-defined
number of allowed CC errors on
the primary source.

Backup Source 1 The number of detected continuity Check source

CC Errors counter errors in a pre-configured
Detected time exceeds the pre-defined
number of allowed CC errors on
backup source1.

Backup Source 2 The number of detected continuity Check source

CC Errors counter errors in a pre-configured
Detected time exceeds the pre-defined
number of allowed CC errors on
backup source2.

Backup Source 3 The number of detected continuity Check source

CC Errors counter errors in a pre-configured
Detected time exceeds the pre-defined
number of allowed CC errors on
backup source3.

Backup Source 4 The number of detected continuity Check source

CC Errors counter errors in a pre-configured
Detected time exceeds the pre-defined
number of allowed CC errors on
backup source 4.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 199 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

TsIn Backup Source 5 The number of detected continuity Check source

CC Errors counter errors in a pre-configured
Detected time exceeds the pre-defined
number of allowed CC errors on
backup source 5.

Primary Source Detected a scrambled PID on Check source

Detected primary source.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source 1 Detected a scrambled PID on Check source

Detected backup source 1.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source 2 Detected a scrambled PID on Check source

Detected backup source 2.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source 3 Detected a scrambled PID on Check source

Detected backup source 3.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source 4 Detected a scrambled PID on Check source

Detected backup source 4.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source 5 Detected a scrambled PID on Check source

Detected backup source 5.
Scrambled PID

TS Protection A TS protection redundancy Check source

Activated switch took place.

Could Not Find a All backup sources are faulty. Check source
Proper Backup
Source

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 200 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

CAS ECM Stream This alarm is related to the ECMG 1. Check ECMG logs.
Error machine. Cannot get ECM from 2. Check AC.
ECMG.
3. Check the error number,
reported from ECMG.

ECM Spooling There is a failure in ECM spooling. The total number of spooled
Error tables should not exceed 128
tables per transport stream.

EMM PID Missing The configured EMM is missing  Check EMM configuration
 Check connectivity between
device and EMMG.

EMM Bitrate The bit-rate of the EMM is higher Check EMM configuration
Exceeded than the configured bit-rate

SCS ECMG The ECMG connection has been Check the ECMG properties, the
Connection Error disconnected for 10 seconds. Ethernet network, and the ECMG.
Services may not be encrypted
properly.

SCS EIS Not The TCP connection with the EIS Ensure the following:
Connected client on port 11000 is not  The TCP link with EIS (ping)
established. exists.
 The EIS configuration is 11000.

ECM is Missing in One or more ECMs in one or more Add an ECM and update as
Configuration SCG messages are missing, or the necessary to ensure that all ECMs
device receives an SCG message in SCG messages are present in
with an unknown ECM ID. the ECM configuration.

PID to Scramble One of the PIDs that suppose to Verify output configuration and EIS
is Missing in be scrambled isn't configured in SCG provisioning.
Config the output.

SCS ECMG The ECMG connection has been Check the ECMG properties, the
Communication disconnected for 10 seconds. Ethernet network, and the ECMG.
Problem Services may not be encrypted
properly.

SCS CP Less than The Crypto Period is less than the Adjust the Crypto Period or Delay
Delay Start delay start. Start property values so that the
crypto period is greater than the
delay start value.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 201 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Reference Remap Range The number of PIDs of the Increase the configured remap
Service Overflow Reference Service exceeds the range.
configured number

Input Service The PMT of the Reference Service Check source

Missing is missing

Input RSS PID At least one PID is missing in the Check source
Missing Reference Service

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 202 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Output PID Missing Provisioned PID is missing in the Check source.

Stream input

Unsupported The input video stream is not Do not attempt to re-encode video
Chroma 4:2:0. streams of chroma sampling mode
Sampling Mode other than 4:2:0.

Low Delay Video The input video stream is low- Do not attempt to re-encode low-
Stream Detected delay and cannot be re-encoded. delay content.

HD Stream The video stream is HD and Do not attempt to re-encode HD

Detected cannot be re-encoded. streams.

Unsupported The input video stream is not Do not attempt to re-encode non-
Frame Rate NTSC. NTSC video.

Unsupported The input video stream horizontal Do not attempt to re-encode a

Resolution resolution is not supported. video stream with a horizontal
resolution that is not 480, 528,
544, 704, or 720.

Encrypted PID The input stream is encrypted and Do not attempt to re-encode
cannot be re-encoded. encrypted content.

No DTS/PTS No DTS/PTS was detected at input Check the input stream.

Detected at Input for 700 ms. The input video
stream is not MPEG compliant.

Invalid DTS at The input video stream is not Check the input stream.
Input MPEG compliant.

Sequence The input video stream is not Check the input stream
Header Error MPEG compliant.

Picture Header The input video stream includes Check input stream.
Error an invalid picture header or bad
marker bits. The input video
stream is not MPEG-compliant.

Video Macro A problem was encountered in Check the source.

Block Level Error decoding the slice and macro
blocks.

MPEG1 Stream The video stream is MPEG1 and Do not attempt to re-encode
Detected cannot be re-encoded. MPEG1 streams.

Progressive A progressive refresh video Remove the progressive refresh

Refresh Stream stream was detected in a re- stream from the re-encoded
Detected encoded service. Re-encoded service.
services do not support
progressive refresh streams.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 203 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Output Field Pictures Field pictures were detected. Field Remove field picture stream from
Stream Detected picture streams are not supported the re-encoded service.
in re-encoded services.

Unexpected The input video stream is not Check the input stream
Frame Rate MPEG compliant.
(Video Standard)

Unable to The device cannot decode the Check the input stream.
Decode Input input stream.
Stream

Corrupt Input TS The input transport stream is Check the input stream.
corrupted.

Processing Input Internal error in transcoding Call customer support

PID Missing engine

Wrong Video This input video format is not Check input

Standard supported in this version.
(MPEG2/H264)

Input Vertical The configured VR does not match Check input

Resolution the actual VR
Mismatch

Vertical A notification because it is service Engine is resetting and transcodes

Resolution affecting. While transcoding the with new resolution.
Changed on input VR type changed.
Input

Invalid Picture Applies to input video format Check input

Type (not I, P or H264. It is a stream related failure
B) while decoding the stream.

Reference PCR Did not get reference PCR for > Check the source.
PID Interval Error 500 ms. Either the PID does not
contain PCR values or it is missing.

PID Recoding Invalid content for reencoding. Check source

Failure

PID Xcoding Invalid content for transcoding Check source

Failure

Input Codec Not The input video type is different Change the input type (should not
Supported than 2, x80 and x1B. require removal and re-creating
the stream)

Output Codec The output codec is not supported Change the output
Not Supported

SD Transcoding When trying to transcode a SD Check configuration

Not Supported stream.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 204 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Output Audio - Cannot Invalid content for decoding. Check input source. If problem
Stream decode - persists, call Customer Support.
Corrupted input

Audio - Decoder The device cannot decode the Check input source and stream
Failure input stream due to either input configuration. If problem persists,
source or stream configuration. call Customer Support.

Audio - Cannot decode an encrypted PID. Check input source.

Encrypted PID
detected

Audio - No input/ No input stream is detected Check input source.

Unable to sync

Audio - No PES No audio frames are detected in Check input source.

detected the input stream.

Audio - Input Inconsistency between actual Check Input Coding Mode

Audio Mode input audio mode and configured configuration.
Higher than audio mode. For example, actual is
Config MC and configured is ST.

Audio - Decoding The input decoding format is set to In the Audio Transcoding tab,
Format Mismatch a low MHz decoder (AAC LC / configure decoding format to Any.
Config. AC3) but actually decoding format
is a high MHz (AAC HE / E-AC3)

Audio - Encoder Is this output stream???? Internal problem.

Failure If problem persists, call Customer
Support.

Audio - The configured output bitrate is Check that bitrate configuration is

Unsupported not supported for the configured supported for configured Output
Output Bitrate coding mode. Coding Mode. See Table 5-24 on
page 126..

Audio - The configured output coding Check configuration. Try changing

Unsupported mode is not supported. Follow to another value.
Output Coding
Mode

Audio - Output sample rate is always as in Check configuration

Unsupported the input.
Output Sample
Rate

Audio - Cannot PCR insertion rate is too low. Increase the audio ES bitrate
Meet PCR
Insertion Rate

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 205 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Output Audio - Encoder No PTS was detected at input for Check input source
Stream detect PTS Gap XXX ms. The input video stream is
not MPEG compliant

Output Backup Service 1 Backup serivce1 is activated Informational alarm only.

Service is Activated Look for another alarm that
triggered the backup service.

Backup Service 2 Backup service 2 is activated Informational alarm only.

is Activated Look for another alarm that
triggered the backup service.

Backup Service 3 Backup service is 3 activated Informational alarm only.

is Activated Look for another alarm that
triggered the backup service.

Service Failure Service is not streamed out Check source

Recoding Unit The recoding unit crashed Check the input stream
Failure resulting from an unknown error,
or the input video stream is not
MPEG compliant.

Input PCR Interval error > 100 ms. Informational only.

Interval Error

Corrupt Input The device detects more than one

PCR time base discontinuity within one
second.

PCR on The input PCR is not carried on the Informational alarm.

Unsupported video component.
Component

Too Many ES The input service includes a Do not attempt to re-encode

number of non video elementary content with more than one video
streams beyond the device's re- and five non video elementary
encoding capabilities. The streams.
maximum number of ES on the
ProStream 9000 is 6.

Could not The device could not allocate a re- Check how many re-encoded
Allocate encoder to re-encode this service. services (VBR, Caped VBR, and
Recoding Unit There were no free units to re- DTMX pools) were configured and
encode the program. remove unnecessary services.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 206 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Output Excessive Non- The allocated video rate is less Monitor the service to check its
Service Video Rate than 2 Mbps. behavior. If problem persists, call
Customer Support.

I-Frame Dropped Due to errors in the input, the Check the input stream.
capped GOP structure was
violated, and an I-frame was
dropped.

ReEncoded There is no video ES for the re- Verify that a video PID is
Service Required encoded service. provisioned on the service.
Video ES

ReEncoded In DiviTrackMX, the rate is too low N/A

Service Rate Too for encoding.
Low

EAS is Activated EAS service is activated. None

EAS Input The associated EAS input service Check the EAS input transport to
Service Missing is missing. ensure that the associated EAS
input service exists.

Pass-Through Input bit rate of the Pass-Through Check input signal.

Service Service is higher than Max Bit
Exceeded Max Rate. Service output will be muted.
Rate

Slate Service is Occurs when the Slate feature is None

Activated activated.

Slate Service Occurs on the service output The stream cannot flow end-to-
Failure when the Slate is missing from the end. Check input stream.
service input (even when the Slate
is not activated).

Primary Service The primary/backup source failed. The stream cannot flow end-to-
Failure end. Check input stream.

Backup Service 1 The stream cannot flow end-to- Check input stream.
Failure end.

Backup Service 2 The stream cannot flow end-to- Check input stream.
Failure end.

Backup Service 3 The stream cannot flow end-to- Check input stream.
Failure end.

Service Name In splicing, another spliceable Check configuration

SCTE30 Error service with the same name is
detected

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 207 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Output Exceeded In splicing, too many PIDs are Check configuration to match
Service Spliceable ESs associated with the service. The spec
Capacity maximum PIDs are:
Up to one video, up two audio, up
to eight data PIDs

No SCTE30 In splicing, Ad-Server either did Check Ad-Server configuration

connection not send Init request or Init
request is wrong.

Insertion Channel Insertion channel (ad) did not Check Ad-Server streaming
is Missing arrive on time. interface.

Input PMT PMT entry required on the output Recheck the extraction settings on
Missing was not received on the input. the service provided as the tables’
input for the PSIP/DVB
regeneration.

Input VCT VCT entry required on the output Recheck the extraction settings on
Missing was not received on the input. the service provided as the tables’
input for the PSIP regeneration.

ReEncoded DiviTrackMX, internal fault If alarm persists, call Customer

Service Missed Support
Rate

Transcoding Unit The transcoding unit crashed Check the input stream.
Failure resulting from an unknown error,
or the input video stream is not
MPEG compliant.

Could not Too many services to transcode. Check configuration

Allocate Cannot allocate trans engine
Transcoding Unit

Reenc and Trans Wrong configuration Check configuration either to

are selected for reencode or to trans
the Service

Service Name Another Splice enabled service Change to a unique service name
SCTE30 Error with the same name is provisioned

Exceeding No. of Check the max. number of PIDs Max. number of PIDs per Splice
PIDs per Splice per Splice enabled service. enabled service is:
Service  1 Video PID
 Up to 8 Audio PIDs
 Up to 4 Data PIDs

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 208 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10-1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source
Alarm Message Description Solution
Object

Service Insertion Channel Splicer could not receive the Ad at Check connection with the Ad
Output is Missing the insertion channel for a certain server (video network)
Splice event.

Splice Event Splicer could not play the Ad and Check that ad streams are
Failed. Session ID had to return to the network feed provisioned and that they are valid
#

Splicing License Exceeded the number of installed Install additional DPI licenses or
Missing DPI licenses. reduce number of splice enabled
services

Could Not Splicer could not allocate a Splice Check that the GbE 4G card is
Allocate Splice Engine for the service. installed properly
Engine

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 209 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 11
Additional Tools

11.1 Overview
The Tools web client page includes additional features. These features are grouped as
follows:
 IGMP - allows you to select the required IGMP version. See Selecting IGMP Version on
page 210
 NTP and Time - allows you to set the time of the device. See Setting Device Time on
page 211
 Password - allows to define an access level. See Setting a Password on page 211
 HW Clock Source - allows to set the hardware clock source. See Defining HW Clock
Source on page 211
 A/V Processing - allows to define the following:
 Set-top-box mode. See Defining the Set-Top-Box on page 212.
 ACE Video Configuration - allows to enable PIP and to set the video frequency. See
Defining ACE Video Configuration on page 212.
 ACE Audio Configuration - allows to define silence insertion. See Defining ACE Audio
Configuration on page 212.
 EAS - allows you to configure Emergency Alert System. See Configuring EAS Parameters
on page 213
 SNMP - see Defining SNMP Parameters on page 214
 BDS - for future use
 VIS - see Video Inventory System (VIS) on page 214
 Licenses - see Licenses on page 215

11.2 Selecting IGMP Version

IGMP-v3 allows to reuse multicast addresses in a network. Multicast streams in an IGMP-v3
enabled network are identified not only by their destination address, but also by their source
address.
ProStream 9000 may operate either in IGMP-v2 or IGMP-v3 mode. Switching between
modes is service affecting.
 To select IGMP Version
1. In the web page, select Tools > IGMP tab.

2. Open the list and select the required mode:

 Auto Detect
 IGMP Version 2
 IGMP Version 3

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 210 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Setting Device Time

11.3 Setting Device Time

11.3.1 Network Time Protocol (NTP)
The Network Time Protocol table allows to synchronize the device time with the Universal
Time Coordination (UTC) by connecting the device to an NTP server. If you enable this option,
you cannot set the time of the unit manually.
 To set ProStream time according to the NTP server
Once you set the time according to the NTP server, you cannot set ProStream time manually.
1. In the web page, select Tools > Time tab.

2. To synchronize the ProStream time with the UTC time, check the NTP Enable box.
The Date and Time fields are disabled.
3. In NTP Server IP Address, enter the IP address of the NTP server.
In case an NTP server is unavailable, you may set the unit time manually.

11.3.2 Setting Device Time Manually

1. In the Date and Time fields, enter date and time respectively. Date format: mm/dd/yyyy.
Day format: hh:mm:ss.
2. To send required date and time to the unit, click Set Clock.
A verification message appears.
3. Click Ok.
The required time is sent to the unit and the date and time are updated immediately.
4. To set the local time offset according to the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), open the Local
Time Offset list and select the required GMT offset.

NOTE: Set manually local time offset upon Day Light Saving changes.

11.4 Setting a Password

 Select Tools > Password tab. See Setting/Changing a Password on page 15.

11.5 Defining HW Clock Source

NOTE: SFN application is currently unsupported.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 211 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Defining the A/V Processing

In SFN application, the Receiver accepts an external clock signal over an ASI port 1 of any
card.
1. In the web page, select Tools > HW Clock Source.

2. Under HW Clock Source, select the required option:

Internal - to revert to an internal clock
Slot 1- slot 5 - select the requires slot for receiving the external clock.

11.6 Defining the A/V Processing

11.6.1 Defining the Set-Top-Box
1. Select Tools > A/V Processing tab and focus on the Set-Top Box section.

2. Open the Mode list and select either of the following:

 DVB
 Motorola
 Philips

11.6.2 Defining ACE Video Configuration

1. Select Tools > A/V Processing tab and focus on the ACE Video section.

2. Open the PIP Enable list and select either of the following:
 Disable, default option
 Enable
3. To set the video frequency, open the Video Frequency list and select 50Hz or 60Hz.

11.6.3 Defining ACE Audio Configuration

1. Select Tools > A/V Processing tab and focus on the ACE Video section.

2. Open the Silence Insertion Enable list and select either of the following:
 Enable - Full support of Silence Mode. If enabled, silence is inserted in cases of
corrupt/missing audio input.
 Disable

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 212 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Configuring EAS Parameters

3. In Silence Insertion Timeout (msec), enter the required time out. The default is 200
milli.seconds. Indicates the period of time for input loss that requires the activation of
silence insertion.

11.7 Configuring EAS Parameters

To configure the Emergency Alert System, do the following:
1. Select Tools > EAS.

2. Open the EAS Mode list and select one of the following:
 None - no EAS application
 GPI Converter - ProStream 9000 serves as the GPI converter that generates EAS
request.
 EAS Receiver - ProStream 9000 serves as the EAS receiver. Once you select EAS
Receiver, additional fields appear for configuring the EAS receiver and the input EAS
channel.

11.7.1 Configuring EAS Receiver

If EAS Receiver is selected, the following fields appear in the EAS tab:

1. In IP Address, enter the EAS receiver IP address.

2. In UDP Port, enter the UDP port to receive the EAS.
3. In Site ID, enter the site ID of the EAS receiver.
4. In Group ID, enter the group ID of the EAS receiver.
5. Click Active AES, to activate ProStream 9000 as AES receiver.
6. To add an EAS channel, click Add EAS Channel.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 213 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Defining SNMP Parameters

7. Open the TS Stream Input and select the required TS. This list is populated with TSs with
EAS services.
8. In Service ID, enter the required service ID, that is an EAS service.
9. In Name, enter the required service name for this EAS service.

NOTE: See also Setting EAS Parameters on page 88.

11.8 Defining SNMP Parameters

The device is capable of reporting its status via SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) to a third-party SNMP-based network management systems.
The status of the device is reported to the SNMP manager as SNMP Traps - notifications that
the device initiates and sends to the SNMP manager to indicate the assertion or remittance of
an alarm or warning. SNMP Traps are sent only to SNMP managers that are registered with
the device. To allow sending SNMP traps, configure up to four SNMP managers as explained
below:
 To forward SNMP traps:
1. Select Tools > SNMP tab.

2. In IP 1 - IP 4, enter the IP address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP
traps from the device.

11.9 Video Inventory System (VIS)

As services traverse the network, multicast addresses change due to local service
aggregation and ad splicing. Since the operator cannot correlate a multicast address to a
particular service, it becomes difficult to address quality issues and resolve outages in a
timely fashion resulting in longer down times, higher call volume, and a less than optimal
customer experience.
The VIS feature allows to create a video inventory system by appending information to the
Service Description Table (SDT). The SDT is populated at the multiplex source within the
Comcast network, and updated by each device that manipulates the MPEG transport stream
with a device identification. Thus, you can easily determine the path for any given service.
 To use the VIS feature
1. Select Tools > VIS tab:

2. Select Video Inventory System to enable the VIS feature.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 214 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

3. In System Name enter the required name to append to the SDT table.

11.10 Licenses
The following features of ProStream 9000 require licensing:
 Video and audio transcoding - each transcoded stream requires a license
 VBR pools - ACE DiviTrackMX™
To transcode, you need to purchase a license. For the complete list of available licenses, see
Table 11-3 on page 216.
Licenses are arranged in hierarchy according to their capabilities. You can use a license with
a high hierarchy for operation that requires a lower hierarchy as the following examples show:
 If you purchased a HD transcoding license, you can use it for SD transcoding.
 If you purchased a H.264 transcoding license, you can use it for MPEG-2 transcoding.
To view license hierarchies, see Licenses Hierarchy on page 223.
ProStream 9000 is shipped with the purchased licenses. In case you need an additional
license, ProStream 9000 grants you a grace period that allows you to use this feature. Grace
period is for 45 days of device uptime. When Grace period is active, the alarm License Grace
Period Enabled is raised. Once licenses are installed, the grace period is reloaded.
The following table lists the licensing specifications

Table 11-1: Licensing Specifications

Parameter Explanation

Licensed feature  Video and audio transcoding (ACE only) - per each
stream
 VBR pools - ACE DiviTrackMX™

License Type  Permanent - Once you install a license, it is for

unlimited time
 Grace - All features are working for 45 days grace
period. Grace period of 45 days is counted
according to device uptime.
 Expired - Licenses that are based on a calendar
timeline. These licenses are for demo purposes
only.

License Management Licenses are added/removed via the following:

 External license tool (NLM) - this tool resided on
another PC. The device uses HTTP to transfer files
from/to NLM. See Licensing System Architecture
on page 216.
Note: Adding/removing licenses does not affect
running streams. However, it affects licensing
allocation. See License Allocation on page 224.
Note: In case of card failure, to release licenses you
should manually disable transcoding.

Firmware Upgrade/ Licenses are maintained after upgrade/downgrade.

Downgrade

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 215 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

Table 11-1: Licensing Specifications

Parameter Explanation

License Allocation Licenses are allocated according to their hierarchy.

See License Allocation on page 224.

11.10.1 Licensing System Architecture

Table 11-2: Licensing System Architecture Legend

Term Explanation

NLM Nodelock License Manager. A desktop application

FNO Flexera database that stores licenses at the Harmonic

backoffice

11.10.2 Supported Licenses

The following table lists the currently supported licenses

Table 11-3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

1 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT- 180 days Firmware License for DEMO

DEMO enables output of HD, SD, MPEG-
2, H.264, audio Transcoding

2 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT- p Firmware License for LAB enables

LAB output of HD, SD, MPEG-2, H.264,
audio Transcoding

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 216 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

Table 11-3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

3 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT- P Firmware License for ANY output

OUT format: HD, SD, MPEG-2, H.264
Transcoding

4 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP P Firmware License for Transcoding

FIRMWARE LICENSE FOR ALL
ProStream 9000 FUNCTIONS for
BACKUP

5 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE 30 days Firmware License for ACE COLD

SPARE HD, SD, MPEG-2, H.264
output Transcoding

6 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-OUT-SD P Firmware License for SD MPEG-2,

H.264 output Transcoding

7 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-PIP-AVC-OUT P Firmware License for H.264 PIP

output Transcoding

8 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD P Firmware License for HD, H.264

output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [012]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD on page 225

9 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD P Firmware License for SD, H.264

output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [013]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD on page 225

10 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD P Firmware License for HD, MPEG-2

output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [017]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD on
page 226

11 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD P Firmware License for SD, MPEG-2

output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [018]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD on
page 226

12 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC- P Firmware License for DownConvert

OUT-SD to SD, H.264 output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [014]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD on
page 225

13 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2- P Firmware License for DownConvert

OUT-SD to SD, MPEG-2 output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [015]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-OUT-SD on
page 225

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 217 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

Table 11-3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

14 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP- P Firmware License for HD H.264

OUT PIP output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [016]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP-OUT on
page 226

15 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP- P Firmware License for SD H.264 PIP

OUT output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [022]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP-OUT on
page 226

16 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT P Firmware License for Audio

Transcoding of Stereo output
Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [009]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT on page 225

17 FW- PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC- Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Multichannel output
Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [008]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT on
page 225.

18 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC- P Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Dolby Digital
Multichannel output Transcoding
see [004]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-
DD-MC-OUT on page 224

19 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST- P Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Stereo Dolby Digital
output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [005]:FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT on
page 224

20 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+- P Firmware License for Audio

MC-OUT Transcoding of Dolby Digital+
Multichannel output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [002]:FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT on
page 224

21 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST- P Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Dolby Digital+
Stereo output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [003]:FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT on
page 224

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 218 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

Table 11-3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

22 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX- P Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Multichannel IN,
Stereo OUT output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [007]:FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-OUT on
page 224

23 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX- P Firmware License for Audio

DD-OUT Transcoding of Multichannel IN,
Stereo Dolby Digital output
Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [006]:FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-DD-OUT on
page 224

24 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC P Firmware License for Multichannel

5.1 Audio Leveling
For hierarchy, see [010]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC on page 225

25 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-ST P Firmware License for Stereo 2.1

Audio Leveling
For hierarchy, see [011]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUDLVL-ST on page 225

26 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-AUD- P Firmware License for Mobile/Web

AAC-OUT audio xcoding of AAC stereo out
For hierarchy, see [019]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MW-AUD-AAC-OUT on
page 226

27 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR- P Mobile/Web AVC MBR-group of 2

OUT-HD HD or 1HD + 0 to 3 SD profiles
Firmware License
For hierarchy, see [020]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-HD on
page 226

28 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR- P Mobile/Web AVC MBR-group of up

OUT-SD to 4 SD profiles Firmware License
For hierarchy, see [021]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-SD on
page 226

29 FW-PRM-9K-DTMX-1 P DTMX FW License

For hierarchy, see [028]: FW-PRM-
9K-DTMX-1 on page 227

30 SW-LIC-PRM-9K-DT P Firmware DiviTrackIP License per

pool
For hierarchy, see [037]: SW-LIC-
PRM-9K-DT on page 228

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 219 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

Table 11-3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

31 FW-PRM-9K-SLATE-SRV-1 P Firmware for Slate insertion per

service. Enable to switch any
service to an alternative source
(Slate)
For hierarchy, see [036]: FW-PRM-
9K-SLATE-SRV-1 on page 228

32 FW-PRM-9K-EAS-1 P Firmware license for Emergency

Alert System
For hierarchy, see [030]: FW-PRM-
9K-EAS-1 on page 227

33 FW-PRM-9K-SELCSCR-1 P Firmware license for Selective

Encryption of 1 SPTS
For hierarchy, see [035]: FW-PRM-
9K-SELCSCR-1 on page 228

34 FW-PRM-9K-BISS-FIX-SRV-1 P Firmware license for BISS Fixed

key Scrambling per Service
For hierarchy, see [024]: FW-PRM-
9K-BISS-FIX-SRV-1 on page 227

35 FW-PRM-9K-8VSB P Firmware license for platform

equipped with 8VSB Receiver
module, enabling reception of one
ATSC RF channel
For hierarchy, see [001]:FW-PRM-
9K-8VSB on page 224

36 FW-PRM-9K-DESAES-1 P Firmware license for AES De-

Scrambling of 1 Service
For hierarchy, see [025]: FW-PRM-
9K-DESAES-1 on page 227

37 FW-PRM-9K-SCTE35-1 P Firmware license for SCTE-35

Insertion on 1 service
For hierarchy, see [033]: FW-PRM-
9K-SCTE35-1 on page 227

38 FW-PRM-9K-AES-CW P Firmware license for AES

Scrambling per 1 service
For hierarchy, see [023]: FW-PRM-
9K-AES-CW on page 226

39 FW-PRM-9K-DVB-CW P Firmware license for DVB

Scrambling per 1 service
For hierarchy, see [029]: FW-PRM-
9K-DVB-CW on page 227

40 FW-PRM-9K-DESFIX-SRV-1 P Firmware license for Fixed key De-

Scrambling of 1 service
For hierarchy, see [026]: FW-PRM-
9K-DESFIX-SRV-1 on page 227

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 220 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

Table 11-3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

41 FW-PRM-9K-SCRFIX-SRV-1 P Firmware license for Fixed key

Scrambling of 1 service
For hierarchy, see [032]: FW-PRM-
9K-SCRFIX-SRV-1 on page 227

42 FW-PRM-9K-FEC-TS-1 P Firmware license for ProMPEG

COP3 Forward Error Correction for
1 MPTS
For hierarchy, see [031]: FW-PRM-
9K-FEC-TS-1 on page 227

43 FW-PRM-9K-SELC-EHP-1 P Firmware enabling Encryption

Hacking Protection scrambling
mode per platform
For hierarchy, see [034]: FW-PRM-
9K-SELC-EHP-1 on page 228

44 FW-PRM-9K-SELC-EHP-1 P Firmware enabling Encryption

Hacking Protection scrambling
mode per platform.
For hierarchy, see  [034]: FW-PRM-
9K-SELC-EHP-1 on page 228

45 FW-PRM-9K-DEVICE- P Firmware enabling device

REDUNDANCY redundancy in Stand Alone Mode
using Internal Harmonic Protocol
For hierarchy, see [027]: FW-PRM-
9K-DEVICE-REDUNDANCY on
page 227

46 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-LOGO P ProStream 9000 ACE Logo

insertion for multiscreen -1
Firmware License for MBTS group
For hierarchy, see [038]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MW-LOGO on page 228

47 FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-HD P Firmware Option for ProStream

9000 for H.264 AVC HD splicing
For hierarchy, see [052] FW-PRM-
9K-DPI-AVC-HD on page 228

48 FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-SD P Firmware Option for ProStream

9000 for H.264 AVC SD splicing
For hierarchy, see [051] FW-PRM-
9K-DPI-AVC-SD on page 228

49 FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-HD P Firmware Option for ProStream

9000 for MP2 HD splicing
For hierarchy, see [054] FW-PRM-
9K-DPI-MP2-HD on page 228

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 221 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

Table 11-3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

50 FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-SD P Firmware Option for ProStream

9000 for MP2 SD splicing
For hierarchy, see [053] FW-PRM-
9K-DPI-MP2-SD on page 228

51 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DPI-COND P ProStream 9000 ACE SCTE 35

stream conditioning support
license. One per video stream
required. For hierarchy, see [055]
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DPI-COND on
page 228.

52 FW-PRM-9K-DVBSUB-BURN P ProStream 9000 DVB-sub burn-in

Firmware License per 1 service.
For hierarchy, see [056] FW-PRM-
9K-DVBSUB-BURN on page 229.

11.10.3 Working with Licenses

To transcode and to work with VBR pools, you need to purchase licenses.
To mange your licenses, that is to install and to remove licenses, use the NLM (Nodelock
License Manager), an external tool. See Licensing System Architecture on page 216.
Once you select Transcoding per audio/video PID (Re Muxing tab) and click Apply, the device
activates the license according to the output transcoding format. (See following captures)

NOTE: If you did not configure video or audio transcoding, yet selected Transcoding, once you click
Apply, the default license is activated.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 222 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

Click here to transcode. Once you select

it, the license is activated according to
the configured output transcoding format

11.10.4 Licenses Hierarchy

Licenses are arranged in a hierarchical order: Hierarchy is divided as follows:
 Video - hierarchy among video licenses
 Audio - hierarchy among audio licenses
The following table lists the licensing hierarchy. Hierarchy is arranged from left to right. The
left most license is the most limited license and the right most license is the most
comprehensive one.

License Hierarchy - Example 1

If you purchased license: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD and you need to output an MPEG-2
SD stream.
Due to license hierarchy (see Hierarchy of Licenses on page 224), you can use the FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD license to output an MPEG-2 SD stream.

License Hierarchy - Example 2

If you purchased license: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD and you need to output an MPEG-2
SD stream.
Due to license hierarchy (see Hierarchy of Licenses on page 224), you can use the FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD license to output an MPEG-2 SD stream. However, if you also need to
transcode to HD MPEG-2 output, your purchased license is already occupied by the MPEG-2
SD stream. In this case, you can transcode to HD MPEG-2 output with a Grace type license.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 223 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

The device grants you with the FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD license for a grace period of
45 days. During this time, you can purchase another license and install it as explained in the
following section License Allocation.

License Allocation
To use the FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD, purchase the FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD
license. Once the latter is installed, licenses are re-allocated, and as a result FW-PRM-9K-
ACE-MP2-OUT-HD is free for MPEFG-2 HD transcoding.

11.10.4.1 Hierarchy of Licenses

[001]:FW-PRM-9K-8VSB
FW-PRM-9K-8VSB -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[002]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[003]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-9K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[004]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[005]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-
ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[006]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-DD-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-DD-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-
ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[007]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 224 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-DD-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-

9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[008]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[009]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-
MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[010]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[011]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-ST
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-ST -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC

[012]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[013]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD
[013]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD

[014]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD

[015]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-OUT-SD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-SD-STI -> FW-PRM-
9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 225 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

[016]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-PIP-AVC-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD

[017]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD

[018]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD-STI -> FW-PRM-9K-
SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO
->FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
MP2-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD

[019]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-AUD-AAC-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-AUD-AAC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-
OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[020]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-HD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[021]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-SD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-HD

[022]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-PIP-AVC-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-
ACE-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD

[023]: FW-PRM-9K-AES-CW
FW-PRM-9K-AES-CW -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 226 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

[024]: FW-PRM-9K-BISS-FIX-SRV-1
FW-PRM-9K-BISS-FIX-SRV-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[025]: FW-PRM-9K-DESAES-1
FW-PRM-9K-DESAES-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[026]: FW-PRM-9K-DESFIX-SRV-1
FW-PRM-9K-DESFIX-SRV-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB
-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[027]: FW-PRM-9K-DEVICE-REDUNDANCY
FW-PRM-9K-DEVICE-REDUNDANCY -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[028]: FW-PRM-9K-DTMX-1
FW-PRM-9K-DTMX-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[029]: FW-PRM-9K-DVB-CW
FW-PRM-9K-DVB-CW -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[030]: FW-PRM-9K-EAS-1
FW-PRM-9K-EAS-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[031]: FW-PRM-9K-FEC-TS-1
FW-PRM-9K-FEC-TS-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[032]: FW-PRM-9K-SCRFIX-SRV-1
FW-PRM-9K-SCRFIX-SRV-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB
-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[033]: FW-PRM-9K-SCTE35-1
FW-PRM-9K-SCTE35-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 227 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

[034]: FW-PRM-9K-SELC-EHP-1
FW-PRM-9K-SELC-EHP-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[035]: FW-PRM-9K-SELCSCR-1
FW-PRM-9K-SELCSCR-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[036]: FW-PRM-9K-SLATE-SRV-1
[036]: FW-PRM-9K-SLATE-SRV-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[037]: SW-LIC-PRM-9K-DT
SW-LIC-PRM-9K-DT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[038]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-LOGO
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-LOGO -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[051] FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-SD
FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-HD

[052] FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-HD
FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[053] FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-SD
FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-HD

[054] FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-HD
FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[055] FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DPI-COND
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DPI-COND -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 228 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Licenses

[056] FW-PRM-9K-DVBSUB-BURN
FW-PRM-9K-DVBSUB-BURN -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

11.10.5 License Status

1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select Tools > Licenses.

3. In General, view the following:

 Host ID - Unique number of licenses host, usually chassis serial number.
 Grace period - indicates the grace period in days. When Grace period is expired,
Grace Period Remaining Days appear in red.

Device full Grace period

Device Grace period has

expired

4. In the table, view the following:

 Feature Part Number - the part number of the license
 Description - a short description of the license. See Licenses on page 215.
 In use - indicates the number of licenses per type that are currently being used
 Total - the total number of licenses per type installed on the device

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 229 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Device Redundancy

 Requested - the number of licenses requested for current transcoding configuration

 Expiration - indicates the expiration date of the license. For none expired licenses,
Permanent appears.
Licenses may appear in the table in the following colors:

Table 11-4: Licenses and Colors

Color Explanation

Grayed out Licenses that are not installed or requested

Gray Licenses that are properly installed

Red Licenses in a grace period

Yellow Licenses that are not installed and use other licenses according to
licensing hierarchy

NOTE: In case of an internal licensing failure, a general failure message appears in the Licenses page.

11.11 Device Redundancy

11.11.1 Overview
In order to ensure the continuous transmission of video/data streams, transmitting networks
employ various protection or redundancy options. Redundancy solutions are implemented
where high availability is required. Redundancy solutions provide various levels of assurance
(power supply versus device redundancy) and are application dependant.
This section discusses the redundancy solution in the stream processing realm that relates to
device redundancy of devices that work in standalone mode. This solution eliminates the
need for NMX management for achieving device redundancy. The redundancy mechanism is
a 1:1 device redundancy and it protects from severe failures and provides a high level of
assurance.
To allow redundancy, the system is organized as follows:
 Primary device - one of the ProStream devices is defined as the Primary device. This is
the device that advertises the latest configuration.
 Backup device - one of the devices is defined as the Backup device. This is the device
that gets the most updated configuration from the primary device. Usually the backup
device polls the configuration of the primary device once redundancy is applied and
during operation to monitor for changes in the primary configuration. Once the backup
device gets the configuration it performs the following:
 Updates the configuration and apply it - when updating configuration, basic device
parameters are not updated. For example, device IP address and the assignment of
ports. You need to make sure that the configuration of the port assignment is
identical for the devices in the same group ID. See page 234.
 Device Connectivity - Primary and backup devices are connected via management, or
CAS or GbE ports.
 The connection over any of the ports should be multicast.
 On each device, in the same redundancy group, at least two of the ports eligible for
redundancy, should be assigned.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 230 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Device Redundancy

 On each device, in the same redundancy group, at least same two ports should be
assigned for redundancy.
 The connection is either directly or via a switch. The devices communicate via HHP
(Harmonic Heartbeat Protocol). The devices send to each other heartbeat messages
at an interval defined in milliseconds.
 Group ID (GID) - A network includes multiple Harmonic devices with same ID. To
differentiate between the devices, devices that are on the same redundancy system, are
associated to the same group. Currenlty, a redundancy system consists of two devices
only, a primary device and its backup device.
 Redundancy Types:
 Warm - Backup gets the configuration of the primary device and applies it but the
backup is in active, it does not broadcast
 Hot - Backup gets the configuration of the primary device and applies it and backup
is active, it broadcasts
 Redundancy Switch Types:
 Manual - Upon a Device Redundancy Trigger (DRT), only a manual redundancy switch
takes place. That is, you need to switch from primary to backup.
 Automatic - Upon a Device Redundancy Trigger (DRT), an automatic redundancy
switch takes place.
The following table lists the redundancy switch types and the state of the primary and backup
devices

Table 11-5: Redundancy Types and Redundancy Switch

Redundancy
Primary Backup - Warm Backup - Hot
Switch Type

Manual Active In active Active

Automatic Active/In active* Active/In active* N/A

* Pending device state - always one device is active and the other is in active.

11.11.1.1 List of DRTs (Device Redundancy Triggers)

When the following alarms are raised a redundancy switch takes place:
CPC HW Failure
Card Missing
Card Mismatch
8VSB Card HW Failure
GbE Card HW Failure
Quad GbE Card HW Failure
ASI Input Signal Loss
ASI Input Sync Loss
To see the list of alarms related to redundancy, see Troubleshooting on page 186, under
Platform.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 231 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Device Redundancy

11.11.2 Configuring Device Redundancy

The following instructions refer to 1:1 device redundancy. You need to configure the
redundancy parameters for both the primary and for the backup device. The instructions refer
to both, unless else is indicated.
1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into the Device on page 14.
2. Select Tools > Redundancy > General tab.

3. Select Enable Redundancy.

NOTE: Once two devices are working in redundancy mode and you disable redundancy, the device start
broadcasting as a standalone device.

The tab is updated as the following picture shows:.

4. HHP Version - open the HHP Version list and select the required version:
 Version 1 - Applies to NMX device redundancy only.
 Version 2 - By default Version 2 is selected.
5. Redundancy Mode - open the Redundancy Mode list and select either of the following:
 Automatic - the default option
 Manual - the redundancy switch is done by the user.
6. Device Role - open the Device Role list and select one of the following options:
 Primary - this device advertises the latest configuration.
The following options refer to a backup device:
 Warm Backup - Backup gets the configuration of the primary device and applies it but
the backup is in active, it does not broadcast.
 Hot Backup - Backup gets the configuration of the primary device, applies it and
broadcasts.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 232 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Device Redundancy

7. Group ID - enter the required Group ID number. Group ID should be the same for the
primary and backup device.

NOTE: You should not move a device from a group when it is broadcasting and is connected to a
network.

8. Click Apply.
The redundant devices start communicate via the HHP protocol. The backup device
obtains the configuration of the primary device and during operations monitors for
changes in the configuration of the primary device.

11.11.2.1 Re-Synchronization Button

The Resync button allows to obtain the configuration of the primary. Typically, the backup
device polls the primary configuration during operation to monitor for changes in the
configuration. Use this button in case a problem arises.

11.11.3 Viewing Redundancy Group Information

1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into ProStream 9000 on page 13.
2. Select Tools > Redundancy > Group Information tab.

3. View the following for all devices of the group:

Table 11-6: Redundancy Group Information

Parameter Explanation

# Sequential number

Device Mode Indicates whether Automatic or Manual.

Device Role Indicates whether primary /warm backup/hot backup

Status OK - device is up and running

Fail - device is faulty

IP The IP address of the device

Name The name of the device

SGID Sub Group ID. For future use

MAC The MAC address of the device

Configuration The exact time and date the last configuration synchronization
Sync. between the primary and backup took place. For future use.

State The actual state of the device:

Active
Inactive - Standby

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 233 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 11 Additional Tools Device Redundancy

11.11.4 Advanced Redundancy Configuration

The Advanced tab allows you to view and configure the GbE ports parameters. It is only for
advanced users.
1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into ProStream 9000 on page 13.
2. Select Tools > Redundancy > Advanced tab.

Backup device Primary device

3. View and configure the GbE ports to carry the redundancy data

Table 11-7: GbE Ports Redundancy Information

Parameter Explanation

Slot # The slot number on which the GbE port is located.

Card Type Indicates whether Main card, or GbE card.

Port Indicates the following:

 GbE - port number
 Main - whether management or CAS

HHP Messages If selected, the port communicates via an HHP protocol for
redundancy purposes.

NOTE: Configure at least two ports to communicate via HHP.

4. Configuration IP Address - appears for the Primary device only. View the primary device IP
address.
5. In Multicast, enter the multicast address that serves the redundancy. The multicast should
be identical for the primary and the backup device.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 234 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Chapter 12
Support

12.1 Support Page

Diagnostic information about the ProStream device is available via the Support and
Troubleshooting page.
1. In the ProStream web client, select the Support tab.
2. Select the required command.
3. Enter the required parameters if required.
4. Click Execute.
5. View the results in the Result section.

12.1.1 Command list

Table 12-1: Command List

Command Explanation Parameter

Clear configuration Removes the current configuration with an

option to remove also the current SW
version.

DiviTrack Information Displays DToIP routes

Get Versions Displays SW and BOOT versions as well as

IOM, CPC and MidPlane FPGA versions.

Recorder Units Allocation Displays the allocation of the recorder units

and allows you to allocate a general or
splicing recorder.

XC Service Information Displays the configured transcoded services

Input PID Information Displays detailed information on all PIDs in Slot number
the input TS.

View Alarms Displays all current alarms.

View CAS Information Displays detailed information on CAS

components

View GbE Card Displays detailed information on the card Slot number
Information and its ports.

View ASI or RC Card Displays detailed information on the mux Slot number
Information configuration and the actual routing.

View ACE Card Displays detailed information on the Ace Slot number
Information configuration and actual routing.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 235 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Chapter 12 Support Support Page

Table 12-1: Command List

Command Explanation Parameter

View ARP table Displays entries of the ARP table of the

system.

View Net Stat Displays information on all network

connections.

View Routing Table Displays the destinations and their

parameters.

View ETH Information Displays detailed information on the

Ethernet ports.

View Extraction Counters Allows to check the input feed status.

View SCTE30 Log Displays a log of SCTE30 messages Location of recent lines

View Splice Manager Displays splice Manager information  Channel name

Information  Time
 Duration
 Reset Counters
 Simulate Cue

Ping Tests that a remote host is reachable Destination IP

Save Configuration Saves the current configuration to a file.

Get Up Time System get up time.

Reset Reboots the device.

Configuration Log Allows to record the configuration and to

present the configuration log.

Upload File Displays the Upload file

Ethereal Displays the Ethereal manager

TS Routes Displays TS routes of all PIDs

Client Log Messages Displays all valid messages

Reset on Device For debug purposes only. Allows to enable/ Setting - Enabled/
Exception disable reboot in case of an unexpected disabled
exception, that is, fatal error.

Prepare Troubleshooting Bundles a set of files required for

Bundle troubleshooting for a later download.

Download Downloads the prepared troubleshooting Clear the IE cache

Troubleshooting Bundle bundle. before downloading

Log Command Traffic Allows to save/discard all the Support page Disabled/Enabled
traffic to/from a file. You can download the
file into the troubleshooting bundle.

Clear Command Traffic Clears the command traffic log (the traffic Logging should be
Log logging has to be disabled) disabled.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 236 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Appendix A
Loader Utility
A.1 Overview
The Loader utility is a powerful tool for saving the ProStream configuration and for uploading
it to your device or any other ProStream unit when required. Downloading and uploading the
configuration enables the following:
 backup configuration
 To upload the configuration to another device
 To upload various settings to the device.
The Loader utility is provided with the ProStream and can be downloaded to your PC.
Following is a short description and instructions on how to operate the Loader utility once you
have downloaded it to your PC. For further information about downloading the application,
see To download the Loader utility on page 23.

A.2 Using the Loader Utility

The following sections guide you on how to use the Loader utility.

A.2.1 Starting the Loader Utility

Once you downloaded the Loader utility, start it when required.
 To start the Loader utility
1. Navigate to the location of the Loader utility and double click the CfgLoader.htm file.
Your browser opens and displays the Loader page:

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 237 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Appendix A Loader Utility Using the Loader Utility

A.2.1.1 Loader Utility Page

The Loader utility page is comprised of the following sections:
 Device Properties - displays the IP address of ProStream unit with the required
configuration.
 Download - allows to download the configuration from the device to your computer.
 Upload - allows to clear previous configuration form the device and to upload the saved
configuration.
 Status - displays the status of the current operation.

A.2.2 Downloading Configuration

When downloading the ProStream configuration the Loader utility saves it as an.XML file. The
.XML file includes all the configuration beside the IP address, Subnet mask and default
gateway of ETH1 port.
 To download configuration
1. In Loader utility, click Save Configuration to File.
A standard Save as window appears.
2. Navigate to the location of your choice and click Save.
Once downloading is complete, a message appears in the Status section of the Loader
page notifying you that the downloading is complete. An .XML file with the configuration
appears in the location of your choice.

A.2.3 Uploading Configuration

When uploading configuration, the Loader utility uploads the required configuration to the
device. (previous configuration is removed)
 To Upload configuration
1. To locate the required configuration, click Browse in the Loader utility page.
2. Browse to the configuration file of your choice and click Open.
The file name appears in the XML Configuration File box.
3. To view the file, click Show .XML File.
A viewer page opens and you can view the file.
4. To upload, click Load Configuration to Device.
The previous configuration is removed and the new one is uploaded. The Status section
notifies you when the uploading is complete. You may use the ProStream with the new
configuration.

NOTE: The uploaded configuration does not include the IP address, Subnet Mask and default gateway of
ETH1.

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 238 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

 Appendix B
Standard ES Types and Descriptors
B.1 Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types
The following standards are used to define types of elementary stream:

Value Description

0x0 ITU-T | ISO/IEC Reserved

0x1 ISO/IEC 11172 Video

0x2 ITU-T Rec. H.262 | ISO/IEC 13818-2 Video or ISO/IEC 11172-2

constrained parameter video stream

0x3 ISO/IEC 11172 Audio

0x4 ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio

0x5 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 private_sections

0x6 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 PES packets containing private
data

0x7 ISO/IEC 13522 MHEG

0x8 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 Annex A DSM CC

0x9 ITU-T Rec. H.222.1

0xA ISO/IEC 13818-6 type A

0xB ISO/IEC 13818-6 type B

0xC ISO/IEC 13818-6 type C

0xD ISO/IEC 13818-6 type D

0xE ISO/IEC 13818-1 auxiliary

0xF-0x7F ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 Reserved

0x80 - 0xFF User Private

B.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG)

The following MPEG standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and
programs:

Value Description

0x2 Video stream descriptor

0x3 audio stream descriptor

0x4 hierarchy descriptor

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 239 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Appendix B Standard ES Types and Descriptors Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)

Value Description

0x5 registration descriptor

0x6 data stream alignment descriptor

0x7 target background grid descriptor

0x8 video window descriptor

0x9 CA descriptor

0xA ISO 639 descriptor

0xB system clock descriptor

0xC multiplex buffer utilization descriptor

0xD copyright descriptor

0xF private data indicator descriptor

0x10 smoothing buffer descriptor

0x12 IBP descriptor

B.3 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)

The following DVB standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and
programs:

Value Description

0x51 Mosaic descriptor

0x52 Stream identifier descriptor

0x56 Teletext descriptor

0x59 Subtitling descriptor

0x5F Private data specifier

0x60 Service move descriptor

0x65 CA system descriptor

0x66 Data broadcast ID descriptor

© 2013 Harmonic Inc. 240 ProStream 9000, Version 10.3, Rev B

Harmonic Inc.
4300 North First Street
San Jose, CA 95134 U.S.A.